You are on page 1of 305

Select Coat® Series

SL-940
Conformal Coating
System

Installation, Operations, and


Maintenance Manual

P/N 7210918, Rev 08


NOTICE
This is a Nordson ASYMTEK publication, which is protected by copyright. Original copyright date 2008.
No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the
prior written consent of Nordson ASYMTEK. The information contained in this publication is subject to
change without notice.
Contact Us
Nordson ASYMTEK welcomes requests for information, comments, and inquiries about its products.
Please contact us using the information below:

Headquarters 2747 Loker Avenue West


Carlsbad, CA 92010-6603
USA
Toll Free: +1-800-ASYMTEK (1-800-279-6835)
Tel: +1-760-431-1919
Fax: +1-760-431-2678
E-mail: info@nordsonasymtek.com
Website: www.nordsonasymtek.com
Customer Service
Toll Free: +1-877-218-1144
Tel: +1-440-985-4671
Fax: +1-888-229-4580
E-mail: americas.at.cs@nordson.com

Technical Support
USA: +1-800-ASYMTEK (1-800-279-6835)
Other regions: www.nordsonasymtek.com

Trademarks
Asymtek®, Select Coat®, and EasyCoat® are registered trademarks of Nordson Corporation.
Swirl Coat™ is a trademark of Nordson Corporation.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

WARNING! This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

Text P/N 11016027, Rev 2 Original Instructions © 2019 Nordson Corporation


Manual Conventions
Bold Text Coating system labels, buttons and switches, and software menu selections and
commands appear in this text style.
[Bracketed Text] [Bracketed Text] indicates a single key or key combination to press on a
computer keyboard, such as [Enter] or [Alt + Tab].
Text > Text Refers to a series of menu bar commands in the EasyCoat software.

WARNING! Personnel Safety Warning. This symbol appears in a shaded text block to warn
you about actions that could cause personal injury or death.

CAUTION! Property Damage Caution. This symbol appears in a shaded text block to warn
you about actions that could cause serious damage to the machinery, software,
parts being processed, and facilities.

 NOTE This symbol appears next to helpful information relating to text that precedes it, or
information you must know before proceeding.

TIP This symbol appears next to a timesaving or technique tip.

ii © 2019 Nordson Corporation


Table of Contents
1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 System Description ............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.4 Manuals ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.5 Training ................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.6 Supported Coating Materials ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.7 Feature Description ............................................................................................................... 1-3
1.7.1 Computer System..................................................................................................... 1-3
1.7.2 EasyCoat Software .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.7.3 Bar Code Recognition System ................................................................................. 1-3
1.7.4 Light Beacon ............................................................................................................ 1-3
1.7.5 Board Present Sensor .............................................................................................. 1-3
1.7.6 Brush Box ................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.7.7 Conveyor .................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.7.8 Dual Simultaneous Applicator Capability ................................................................. 1-4
1.7.9 Dual Toggle Applicator Capability ............................................................................ 1-4
1.7.10 Electronic Pressure (E/P) Regulator ........................................................................ 1-4
1.7.11 Fluid Filter................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.7.12 Fluid Regulator ......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.7.13 In-Cell Inverter .......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.7.14 Laser Fan Width Control System ............................................................................. 1-4
1.7.15 Laser Pointer Programming Tool ............................................................................. 1-4
1.7.16 Low Air Pressure Sensor ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.7.17 Low Fluid Sensor (for external reservoir) ................................................................. 1-5
1.7.18 Low Fluid Scale ........................................................................................................ 1-5
1.7.19 Low Solvent Cup Sensor .......................................................................................... 1-5
1.7.20 Material Change Over System ................................................................................. 1-5
1.7.21 Pre-Queue and Post-Queue Board Stations............................................................ 1-5
1.7.22 Qadence Flow Control ............................................................................................. 1-5
1.7.23 Safety Interlock......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.7.24 Solvent Cups ............................................................................................................ 1-5
1.7.25 Tooling Plate ............................................................................................................ 1-5
1.7.26 Tooling Rails............................................................................................................. 1-6
1.7.27 Upstream and Downstream SMEMA Sensors ......................................................... 1-6
1.7.28 Ultraviolet (UV) Light ................................................................................................ 1-6
1.7.29 Ventilation System.................................................................................................... 1-6
1.8 Vision System........................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.8.1 Teach Camera.......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.8.2 Fiducial Find Camera ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.9 Fluid Systems ........................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.9.1 SC-104HS/SC-105HS Circulating Film Coater ........................................................ 1-7
1.9.2 SC-204HS/SC-205HS Non-Circulating Film Coater ................................................ 1-7
1.9.3 SC-280N/SC-280C Non-Circulating/Circulating Film Coater ................................... 1-7
1.9.4 SC-300/SC-350 Swirl Coat Applicator ..................................................................... 1-7
1.9.5 SC-400 PreciseCoat Conformal Coating Jet ........................................................... 1-7
1.9.6 Four Position Tilt Accessory..................................................................................... 1-7
1.9.7 Fifth Position 0-270° Rotate and Tilt Mechanism ..................................................... 1-7
1.9.8 Viscosity Control System ......................................................................................... 1-7

© 2019 Nordson Corporation iii


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

1.10 System Features ................................................................................................................... 1-8


1.10.1 Front View ................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.10.2 Rear View ............................................................................................................... 1-14
2 Safety ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Facility Requirements ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 System Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3.1 Intended Use ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3.2 Misuse ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Basic Safety Precautions and Practices ............................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1 Safety of Personnel .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4.2 Material Safety ......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.3 Preventing Coating System and Workpiece Damage .............................................. 2-4
2.4.4 High-Pressure Fluids ................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.5 Halogenated Hydrocarbon Solvent Hazards ............................................................ 2-4
2.5 Decommissioning .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Disposal ................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.7 Lifting and Transport Precautions ......................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Considerations ......................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.2 Precautions .............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.8 Laser Radiation ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.9 Earthquake Precautions ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.10 Safety Warning Labels .......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.11 Residual Safety Risks ......................................................................................................... 2-13
2.12 Emergency Shutdown ......................................................................................................... 2-14
2.12.1 Emergency Shutdown Situations ........................................................................... 2-15
2.12.2 Emergency Shutdown Recovery ............................................................................ 2-15
2.13 Interlock ............................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.13.1 Interlock Recovery ................................................................................................. 2-16
2.14 Service Shutdown ............................................................................................................... 2-16
2.15 Lockout of Electrical and Pneumatic Energy ...................................................................... 2-16
2.16 Light Beacon ....................................................................................................................... 2-18
3 Installation ........................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Facility Requirements ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.4 Tools and Materials Needed ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.5 Uncrating and Placing the Coating System .......................................................................... 3-2
3.6 Unpacking the Coating Area ................................................................................................. 3-4
3.7 Leveling the Coating System ................................................................................................ 3-5
3.8 Installing the Light Beacon .................................................................................................... 3-8

iv © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

3.9 Installing the Laptop Computer ............................................................................................. 3-9


3.10 Installing the Optional Genie Camera ................................................................................. 3-10
3.11 Anchoring the Coating System............................................................................................ 3-10
3.12 Connecting Power and Air Supply ...................................................................................... 3-11
3.13 EasyCoat Installation........................................................................................................... 3-13
4 Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Powering on the Coating System .......................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Camera States ...................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.5 Starting EasyCoat for Windows ............................................................................................ 4-4
4.6 Operator Screen .................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.6.1 Operator Screen Menu Bar ...................................................................................... 4-6
4.6.2 Variable Monitor ....................................................................................................... 4-7
4.6.3 Event Monitor ........................................................................................................... 4-8
4.6.4 Control Panel............................................................................................................ 4-9
4.6.5 Custom Buttons ........................................................................................................ 4-9
4.7 Jog Window ......................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.7.1 Robot Jog Controls ................................................................................................ 4-10
4.7.2 Conveyor Jog Controls ........................................................................................... 4-13
4.7.3 Shortcut Keys ......................................................................................................... 4-14
4.8 Edit Screen .......................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.9 Pneumatic Regulators and Gauges .................................................................................... 4-16
4.9.1 Main Air Regulator and Gauge............................................................................... 4-17
4.9.2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator and Gauge ............................................................. 4-18
4.9.3 Fluid Pressure and Air Assist Regulators and Gauges .......................................... 4-19
4.9.4 Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge ....................................................................... 4-21
4.10 Monitoring the Air Pressure ................................................................................................. 4-22
4.11 Daily Routine Procedures ................................................................................................... 4-23
4.12 Installing the Coating Applicator.......................................................................................... 4-24
4.13 Filling the Fluid Reservoir .................................................................................................... 4-25
4.14 Changing Material/Flushing Fluid System........................................................................... 4-26
4.15 Running a Characterization ................................................................................................. 4-28
4.16 Loading a Program .............................................................................................................. 4-35
4.17 Running a Program ............................................................................................................. 4-37
4.17.1 Inline System .......................................................................................................... 4-37
4.17.2 Batch System ......................................................................................................... 4-38
4.17.3 Edit Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-39
4.18 Shutdown ............................................................................................................................ 4-40
4.18.1 Emergency Shutdown ............................................................................................ 4-40
4.18.2 Routine Shutdown .................................................................................................. 4-40
4.18.3 Extended Shutdown ............................................................................................... 4-41
4.18.4 Service Shutdown .................................................................................................. 4-41

© 2019 Nordson Corporation v


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

5 Configuration and Setup ................................................................................................................. 5-1


5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Record Keeping..................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.4 Setup Sequence .................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.5 Pointer Selection ................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.6 Tool Configuration ................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.6.1 Camera Configuration .............................................................................................. 5-4
5.6.2 Teach Relative XY.................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.3 Tool Z Offset........................................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.4 Calibrate Rotate/Tilt ............................................................................................... 5-14
5.6.5 Fluid Shape ............................................................................................................ 5-16
5.6.6 Tool Shape ............................................................................................................. 5-16
5.6.7 Choose Color ......................................................................................................... 5-17
5.7 Fixture Configuration ........................................................................................................... 5-18
5.7.1 Fixture Constraint Location .................................................................................... 5-18
5.7.2 Configuring a Fixture on Systems Equipped with a Camera ................................. 5-19
5.8 Conveyor Configuration ...................................................................................................... 5-21
5.9 Inverter Configuration .......................................................................................................... 5-23
5.10 Robot Configuration ............................................................................................................ 5-24
5.10.1 Safe Z Height ......................................................................................................... 5-24
5.10.2 Speed Limit ............................................................................................................ 5-24
5.10.3 Z Speed .................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.11 Fan Width Configuration ..................................................................................................... 5-25
5.12 Needle Finder Configuration ............................................................................................... 5-29
5.13 Bar Code/Data Matrix Scanner Configuration ..................................................................... 5-30
5.13.1 Bar Codes .............................................................................................................. 5-30
6 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3 Record Keeping..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.4 Routine Maintenance Procedures ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.5 Cleaning the Spill Pan ........................................................................................................... 6-3
6.6 Draining the Water Trap ........................................................................................................ 6-4
6.7 Cleaning the Fluid Filter ........................................................................................................ 6-5
6.8 Focusing the Camera ............................................................................................................ 6-7
6.9 Removing and Installing the Axis Covers.............................................................................. 6-8
6.9.1 X-Axis Cable Cover .................................................................................................. 6-8
6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover .................................................................................................. 6-9
6.9.3 Rear Cable Covers ................................................................................................. 6-10
6.10 Lubricating the Cables and Linear Guides .......................................................................... 6-11
6.10.1 Loading the Grease Gun ........................................................................................ 6-11

vi © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

6.10.2 Lubricating the Cables ........................................................................................... 6-11


6.10.3 Lubricating the XY Linear Guides .......................................................................... 6-13
6.11 Tensioning the Cables ........................................................................................................ 6-15
6.11.1 Cable Tension Reminder ....................................................................................... 6-15
6.11.2 Tensioning the XY Cables...................................................................................... 6-16
6.11.3 Tensioning the Z Cable .......................................................................................... 6-17
6.12 Tensioning the Conveyor Chains ........................................................................................ 6-18
7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.3 Record Keeping..................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.4 Basic System Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 7-2
7.4.1 System Power .......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4.2 Pneumatics............................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4.3 Conveyor .................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.4.4 Vision System........................................................................................................... 7-4
8 Parts Replacement ........................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.3 Parts Ordering Information .................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.1 Placing Your Order ................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.2 Shipping Instructions ................................................................................................ 8-2
8.3.3 Warranty ................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Credit and Exchanges ........................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4.1 Return Material Authorization................................................................................... 8-2
8.5 Record Keeping..................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.6 Unpacking and Inspecting Replacement Parts ..................................................................... 8-3
8.7 Cleaning and Inspection ........................................................................................................ 8-3
8.8 Replacing Components Behind the Front Hood ................................................................... 8-4
8.8.1 Replacing the Interlock Switch ................................................................................. 8-4
8.8.2 Replacing the LED Light .......................................................................................... 8-6
8.9 Replacing the Camera, Lens, and Laser Pointer .................................................................. 8-8
8.9.1 Replacing the Camera ............................................................................................. 8-8
8.9.2 Replacing the Camera Lens................................................................................... 8-10
8.9.3 Replacing the Optional Laser Pointer .................................................................... 8-11
8.10 Replacing the Top Cover and Components ........................................................................ 8-13
8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover ....................................................................................... 8-13
8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover ......................................................................................... 8-14
8.10.3 Replacing the Front Pulley Assemblies ................................................................. 8-15
8.10.4 Replacing the Home Sensor PWA ......................................................................... 8-18
8.10.5 Replacing the Rear Pulley Assemblies .................................................................. 8-20
8.10.6 Replacing the Y-Carriage Pulley ............................................................................ 8-23
8.10.7 Replacing the X-Carriage Pulley ............................................................................ 8-25

© 2019 Nordson Corporation vii


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

8.11 Replacing Conveyor and Service Station Components ...................................................... 8-27


8.11.1 Replacing Conveyor Chains................................................................................... 8-27
8.11.2 Replacing the 30 Degree Stop Pin ......................................................................... 8-30
8.11.3 Replacing the Step Motor ....................................................................................... 8-32
8.11.4 Replacing the Sensor Board Assembly ................................................................. 8-34
8.11.5 Replacing the Solvent Cup Bracket ....................................................................... 8-36
8.12 Replacing Control Panel and Components ......................................................................... 8-38
8.12.1 Removing the Control Panel .................................................................................. 8-38
8.12.2 Installing the Control Panel .................................................................................... 8-40
8.12.3 Replacing EMO Actuator Switch ............................................................................ 8-41
8.12.4 Replacing the ON Switch ....................................................................................... 8-43
8.12.5 Replacing the OFF Switch ..................................................................................... 8-45
8.13 Replacing Components Inside the Cabinet ......................................................................... 8-47
8.13.1 Replacing the Regulator Panel .............................................................................. 8-47
8.13.2 Replacing the Reservoir Pressure Regulator ......................................................... 8-49
8.13.3 Replacing the Pressure Gauge .............................................................................. 8-51
8.14 Replacing the Electrical/Pneumatic Panel and Components .............................................. 8-53
8.14.1 Removing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel ............................................................ 8-53
8.14.2 Installing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel .............................................................. 8-54
8.14.3 Replacing the Vent Switch Assembly..................................................................... 8-55
8.14.4 Replacing the 3-Way Valve Assembly ................................................................... 8-57
8.14.5 Replacing a Servo Amp PWA ................................................................................ 8-59
8.14.6 Replacing the Servo Power Control PWA .............................................................. 8-61
8.14.7 Replacing the 3-Way High Flow Valve ................................................................... 8-63
8.14.8 Replacing the SL-940 Main PWA........................................................................... 8-65
8.14.9 Replacing the Main PWA Fuse .............................................................................. 8-67
8.14.10 Replacing the Accessories PWA............................................................................ 8-69
8.14.11 Replacing the Universal Power Supply .................................................................. 8-71
8.14.12 Replacing the Conveyor, Tilt and Spare Pressure Regulators .............................. 8-73
8.14.13 Replacing the Conveyor Pressure Gauge ............................................................. 8-75
8.14.14 Replacing EMO Actuator Switch ............................................................................ 8-77
8.14.15 Replacing the XY Drive .......................................................................................... 8-79
8.14.16 Replacing the Main Air Regulator .......................................................................... 8-87
8.15 Replacing the Fluid System Cover and Components ......................................................... 8-89
8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover......................................................................... 8-89
8.15.2 Installing the Fluid System Cover........................................................................... 8-90
8.15.3 Replacing the Heater Assembly ............................................................................. 8-91
8.15.4 Replacing the Heater Assembly Fuse .................................................................... 8-93
8.15.5 Replacing the Fluid Filter ....................................................................................... 8-95
8.15.6 Replacing the Diaphram Pump .............................................................................. 8-97
8.16 Replacing Components Inside the Lower Rear Cabinet ................................................... 8-101
8.16.1 Replacing the Power Manager ............................................................................. 8-101
8.16.2 Replacing the Power Supply ................................................................................ 8-105
8.17 Spare Parts List ................................................................................................................. 8-107
9 Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Facility Requirements ............................................................................................................ 9-1
9.3 Declaration of Conformity ...................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 9-3

viii © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

9.5 System Dimensions............................................................................................................... 9-4


9.6 Stability Analysis ................................................................................................................... 9-7
Appendix A Material Safety Information..................................................................................... A-1
A.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................A-1
A.2 Safety Data Sheets ...............................................................................................................A-1
A.2.1 Multemp PS NO 2 ....................................................................................................A-2
A.2.2 Moly-Graph Extreme Pressure Multi-Purpose Grease ............................................A-8
Appendix B Block Diagrams ........................................................................................................ B-1
B.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................B-1
B.2 Safety First ............................................................................................................................B-1
B.3 List of Pneumatic and Electrical Diagrams ...........................................................................B-1
B.4 Power Manager Connections ................................................................................................B-2
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... G-1
Index ........................................................................................................................................................... I-1

© 2019 Nordson Corporation ix


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

Table of Figures
Figure 1-1 Front View........................................................................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-2 SL-940 Front Panel........................................................................................................... 1-10
Figure 1-3 Coating Area (SL-940 shown) .......................................................................................... 1-11
Figure 1-4 SL-940 Conveyor .............................................................................................................. 1-12
Figure 1-5 Front Cabinet .................................................................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-6 Rear View ......................................................................................................................... 1-15
Figure 1-7 Fluid System (Rear View) ................................................................................................. 1-17
Figure 1-8 Rear Cabinet..................................................................................................................... 1-18

Figure 2-1 Safety Warning Labels - Front View ................................................................................. 2-10


Figure 2-2 Safety Warning Labels - Laser Fan Width Control ........................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-3 Safety Warning Labels - Conveyor ................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-4 Safety Warning Labels - Rear View.................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 2-5 Safety Warning Labels - UV ............................................................................................. 2-12
Figure 2-6 Safety Warning Labels - Power Manager ......................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-7 SL-940 Safety Hazard Areas ............................................................................................ 2-13
Figure 2-8A EMO (E-Stop) Buttons ...................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-9 EMO/Main Circuit Breaker Locations ............................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-10 Lockout of Electrical Power .............................................................................................. 2-17
Figure 2-11 Lockout of Pneumatic Pressure........................................................................................ 2-17

Figure 3-1 Removing the Shipping Brackets ....................................................................................... 3-2


Figure 3-2 Adjusting the Levelers ........................................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3-3 Dispensing Head Stopper Locations .................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3-4 Removing the Z-Head Bracket ........................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-5 Leveling the Coating System - X-Axis ................................................................................ 3-6
Figure 3-6 Coating System Levelers (Feet) ......................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-7 Leveling the Coating System - Y-Axis ................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3-8 Installing the Light Beacon ................................................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-9 Aligning the Computer to the Tray ...................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-10 Laptop Computer Installed ................................................................................................. 3-9
Figure 3-11 Camera (Rear View) ......................................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-12 Anchoring the Coating System ......................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-13 Connecting the Facilities Power and Air Supply............................................................... 3-12

Figure 4-1 Front Panel Buttons ............................................................................................................ 4-2


Figure 4-2 Camera LED's (Rear View) ................................................................................................ 4-3
Figure 4-3 EasyCoat Operator Screen (Inline System shown) ............................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-4 Operator Screen Menu Bar ................................................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-5 Variable Monitor.................................................................................................................. 4-7
Figure 4-6 Event Monitor...................................................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-7 Controls Tab ....................................................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-8 Control Panel ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-9 Default Custom Button Toolbar .......................................................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-10 Robot XY Jog Controls ..................................................................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-11 Robot Z Jog Controls ........................................................................................................ 4-10
Figure 4-12 Select Tool ........................................................................................................................ 4-10
Figure 4-13 Four Position Tilt ............................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-14 0-90 Degree Rotate .......................................................................................................... 4-12
Figure 4-15 Conveyor Jog Buttons - Single Lane ................................................................................ 4-13
Figure 4-16 Conveyor Jog Buttons - Dual Lane................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-17 Opening the Edit Screen .................................................................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-18 EasyCoat Edit Screen ...................................................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-19 Adjusting Main Air Pressure ............................................................................................. 4-17
Figure 4-20 Adjusting the Reservoir Pressure ..................................................................................... 4-18

x © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

Figure 4-21 Adjusting the Fluid Pressure (E/P Regulators) ................................................................. 4-19
Figure 4-22 Manual Pressure Regulator and Gauge Locations (Single Applicator System shown) .. 4-20
Figure 4-23 Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge ................................................................................. 4-21
Figure 4-24 Monitoring the Fluid Pressure in EasyCoat ...................................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-25 Valve Electrical and Pneumatic Connections ................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-26 Filling the Fluid Reservoir ................................................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-27 EasyCoat Temperature Sense Window ........................................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-28 Fluid System (VCS shown) ............................................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-29 Configure Tool - Operator Screen .................................................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-30 EasyCoat Characterization Wizard Window ..................................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-31 Characterization Sheet ..................................................................................................... 4-31
Figure 4-32 Material Characterization .................................................................................................. 4-32
Figure 4-33 Set Width of Dispense Pattern ......................................................................................... 4-33
Figure 4-34 On/Off Response Times ................................................................................................... 4-33
Figure 4-35 Coating Values ................................................................................................................. 4-33
Figure 4-36 Save Characterization Settings ........................................................................................ 4-34
Figure 4-37 Product Map ..................................................................................................................... 4-35
Figure 4-38 Operator Screen - Conveyor System ............................................................................... 4-35
Figure 4-39 Edit Screen - Open Product Program ............................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-40 Edit Screen - Program Name ........................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-41 Operator Screen - Inline System ...................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-42 Operator Screen - Batch System...................................................................................... 4-38
Figure 4-43 Running a Program - Edit Screen..................................................................................... 4-39

Figure 5-1 Setup Sequence ................................................................................................................. 5-2


Figure 5-2 Selecting a Pointer.............................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-3 Tool Configuration Window ................................................................................................ 5-3
Figure 5-4 EasyCoat Edit Screen - Genie Camera Pointer ................................................................. 5-4
Figure 5-5 Tool Configuration - Genie Camera.................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-6 Select Teach and Camera Tools ........................................................................................ 5-5
Figure 5-7 Position the Teach Tool over a Reference Point ................................................................ 5-5
Figure 5-8 Position the Camera Crosshairs over the Reference Point ................................................ 5-6
Figure 5-9 Click on the Calibration Point with the Mouse .................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-10 Click on the Video Display .................................................................................................. 5-7
Figure 5-11 Confirm Tool Offset Adjustment ......................................................................................... 5-8
Figure 5-12 Selecting a Reference Tool ................................................................................................ 5-9
Figure 5-13 Teaching the Tool Reference Point .................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-14 Teaching the Reference Tool Offset................................................................................. 5-10
Figure 5-15 Teach XY Location for Z Offset ........................................................................................ 5-11
Figure 5-16 Teach Applicator Z Location ............................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-17 Save Changes .................................................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-18 Tool Z Offset Complete..................................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-19 Tool Configuration - Calibrate Rotate/Tilt ......................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-20 Move Applicator to Reference Position ............................................................................ 5-14
Figure 5-21 Calibration Complete ........................................................................................................ 5-15
Figure 5-22 Confirm Reference Position .............................................................................................. 5-15
Figure 5-23 Confirm Safe Z.................................................................................................................. 5-15
Figure 5-24 Tool Configuration - Fluid Shape ...................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-25 Tool Configuration - Tool Shape....................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-26 Tool Configuration - Choose Color ................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-27 Fixture Constraint Location............................................................................................... 5-18
Figure 5-28 EasyCoat Fixture Configuration........................................................................................ 5-19
Figure 5-29 Select the Fluid Applicator ................................................................................................ 5-20
Figure 5-30 Teaching "Front Right" XYZ Coordinates ......................................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-31 Conveyor Settings Window .............................................................................................. 5-21
Figure 5-32 Robot Settings Window .................................................................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-33 Fan Width Control Configuration Window ........................................................................ 5-25
Figure 5-34 Fan Width Tolerance ........................................................................................................ 5-28

© 2019 Nordson Corporation xi


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

Figure 5-35 Needle Finder Setup Window ........................................................................................... 5-29

Figure 6-1 Spill Pan .............................................................................................................................. 6-3


Figure 6-2 Water Trap .......................................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-3 Relieving the Air Pressure .................................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-4 Cleaning the Fluid Filter ...................................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-5 Focusing the Camera ......................................................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-6 X-Axis Cable Cover ............................................................................................................ 6-8
Figure 6-7 Y-Axis Cable Cover ............................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-8 Rear Cable Covers ........................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-9 Lubricating the X-Axis Linear Guides ............................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-10 Lubricating Y-Axis Linear Guides (rear Y-bearings not shown) ....................................... 6-14
Figure 6-11 EasyCoat Maintenance Configuration Dialog Box ........................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-12 Tensioning the XY Cables ................................................................................................ 6-16
Figure 6-13 Tensioning the Z Cable .................................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-14 Tensioning the Conveyor Chains ..................................................................................... 6-18

Figure 8-1 Removing the Interlock Switch ........................................................................................... 8-4


Figure 8-2 Installing the Interlock Switch ............................................................................................. 8-5
Figure 8-3 Removing the LED Light (Wiring Removed for Clarity) ...................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-4 Installing the LED Light (Wiring Removed for Clarity) ........................................................ 8-7
Figure 8-5 Removing the Camera ........................................................................................................ 8-8
Figure 8-6 Installing the Camera .......................................................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-7 Replacing the Camera Lens ............................................................................................. 8-10
Figure 8-8 Removing the Laser Pointer ............................................................................................. 8-11
Figure 8-9 Installing the Laser Pointer ............................................................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-10 Removing the Top Cover .................................................................................................. 8-13
Figure 8-11 Installing the Top Cover .................................................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-12 Removing the Front Pulley Assembly............................................................................... 8-16
Figure 8-13 Installing the Front Pulley Assembly................................................................................. 8-17
Figure 8-14 Removing the Home Sensor PWA ................................................................................... 8-18
Figure 8-15 Installing the Home Sensor PWA ..................................................................................... 8-19
Figure 8-16 Removing the Rear Pulley Assembly ............................................................................... 8-21
Figure 8-17 Installing the Rear Pulley Assembly ................................................................................. 8-22
Figure 8-18 Removing the Y-Carriage Pulley ...................................................................................... 8-23
Figure 8-19 Installing the Y-Carriage Pulley ........................................................................................ 8-24
Figure 8-20 Removing the X-Carriage Pulley ...................................................................................... 8-25
Figure 8-21 Installing the X-Carriage Pulley ........................................................................................ 8-26
Figure 8-22 Creating Slack in the Chain .............................................................................................. 8-27
Figure 8-23 Removing the Retainer Clip .............................................................................................. 8-28
Figure 8-24 Removing the Female Link ............................................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8-25 Removing the Master Link (Male Link) ............................................................................. 8-28
Figure 8-26 Installing the Chain on the Sprocket Rail.......................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8-27 Inserting the Male Link ..................................................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-28 Attaching the Female Link ................................................................................................ 8-29
Figure 8-29 Installing the Retainer Clip ................................................................................................ 8-29
Figure 8-30 Removing the 30 Degree Stop Pin ................................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8-31 Installing the 30 Degree Stop Pin ..................................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8-32 Removing the Step Motor (Components Removed for Clarity) ........................................ 8-32
Figure 8-33 Installing the Step Motor (Components Removed for Clarity) .......................................... 8-33
Figure 8-34 Removing the Sensor Board Assembly ............................................................................ 8-34
Figure 8-35 Installing the Sensor Board Assembly .............................................................................. 8-35
Figure 8-36 Removing the Solvent Cup Bracket.................................................................................. 8-36
Figure 8-37 Removing the Solvent Cup Bracket.................................................................................. 8-37
Figure 8-38 Removing the Control Panel (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity) ............................................ 8-39
Figure 8-39 Installing the Dispensing Station Cover (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity) ........................... 8-40
Figure 8-40 Removing the EMO Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity) .............................................. 8-41
Figure 8-41 Installing the EMO Actuator Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity) ................................. 8-42

xii © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

Figure 8-42 Removing the ON Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)................................................. 8-43
Figure 8-43 Installing the ON Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)................................................... 8-44
Figure 8-44 Removing the OFF Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity) ............................................... 8-45
Figure 8-45 Installing the OFF Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity) ................................................. 8-46
Figure 8-46 Removing the Regulator Panel......................................................................................... 8-47
Figure 8-47 Installing the Regulator Panel........................................................................................... 8-48
Figure 8-48 Removing the Reservoir Regulator .................................................................................. 8-49
Figure 8-49 Installing the Miniature Regulator ..................................................................................... 8-50
Figure 8-50 Removing the Pressure Gauge ........................................................................................ 8-51
Figure 8-51 Removing the Pressure Gauge ........................................................................................ 8-52
Figure 8-52 Removing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel ...................................................................... 8-53
Figure 8-53 Installing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel ........................................................................ 8-54
Figure 8-54 Removing the Vent Switch Assembly ............................................................................... 8-55
Figure 8-55 Installing the Vent Switch Assembly ................................................................................. 8-56
Figure 8-56 Removing the 3-Way Valve Assembly ............................................................................. 8-57
Figure 8-57 Installing the 3-Way Valve Assembly ............................................................................... 8-58
Figure 8-58 Removing the Servo Amp PWA ....................................................................................... 8-59
Figure 8-59 Installing the Servo Amp PWA ......................................................................................... 8-60
Figure 8-60 Removing the Servo Power Control PWA ........................................................................ 8-61
Figure 8-61 Installing the Servo Power Control PWA .......................................................................... 8-62
Figure 8-62 Removing the 3-Way High Flow Valve ............................................................................. 8-63
Figure 8-63 Installing the 3-Way High Flow Valve ............................................................................... 8-64
Figure 8-64 Removing the SL-940 Main PWA ..................................................................................... 8-65
Figure 8-65 Installing the SL-940 Main PWA ....................................................................................... 8-66
Figure 8-66 Rear Cabinet (Electrical and Pneumatic Connections Removed for Clarity) ................... 8-67
Figure 8-67 Main PWA Fuse Location ................................................................................................. 8-68
Figure 8-68 Removing the Accessories 940 PWA ............................................................................... 8-69
Figure 8-69 Installing the Accessories 940 PWA ................................................................................. 8-70
Figure 8-70 Removing the Universal Power Supply ............................................................................ 8-71
Figure 8-71 Installing the Universal Power Supply .............................................................................. 8-72
Figure 8-72 Removing the Regulator ................................................................................................... 8-73
Figure 8-73 Installing the Regulator ..................................................................................................... 8-74
Figure 8-74 Removing the Conveyor Pressure Gauge ........................................................................ 8-75
Figure 8-75 Installing the Conveyor Pressure Gauge .......................................................................... 8-76
Figure 8-76 Removing the EMO Actuator Switch ................................................................................ 8-77
Figure 8-77 Installing the EMO Actuator Switch .................................................................................. 8-78
Figure 8-78 Removing the Rear Cover (1)........................................................................................... 8-79
Figure 8-79 Removing the Rear Cover (2)........................................................................................... 8-80
Figure 8-80 Removing the XY Drive (1) ............................................................................................... 8-81
Figure 8-81 Removing the XY Drive (2) ............................................................................................... 8-82
Figure 8-82 Installing the XY Drive (1) ................................................................................................. 8-83
Figure 8-83 Installing the XY Drive (2) ................................................................................................. 8-84
Figure 8-84 Installing the Rear Cover (1) ............................................................................................. 8-85
Figure 8-85 Installing the Rear Cover (2) ............................................................................................. 8-86
Figure 8-86 Removing the Main Air Regulator..................................................................................... 8-87
Figure 8-87 Installing the Main Air Gauge ........................................................................................... 8-88
Figure 8-88 Removing the Fluid System Cover ................................................................................... 8-89
Figure 8-89 Installing the Fluid System Cover .................................................................................... 8-90
Figure 8-90 Removing the Heater Assembly ....................................................................................... 8-91
Figure 8-91 Installing the Heater Assembly ......................................................................................... 8-92
Figure 8-92 Removing and Replacing the Heater Fuse ...................................................................... 8-94
Figure 8-93 Removing the Fluid Filter .................................................................................................. 8-95
Figure 8-94 Installing the Fluid Filter .................................................................................................... 8-96
Figure 8-95 Removing the Diaphram Pump ........................................................................................ 8-98
Figure 8-96 Tab Alignment................................................................................................................... 8-99
Figure 8-97 Installing the Diaphram Pump ........................................................................................ 8-100
Figure 8-98 Removing the Power Manager Shield ............................................................................ 8-101
Figure 8-99 Removing the Power Manager ....................................................................................... 8-102

© 2019 Nordson Corporation xiii


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

Figure 8-100 Installing the Power Manager ......................................................................................... 8-103


Figure 8-101 Installing the Power Manager Shield .............................................................................. 8-104
Figure 8-102 Removing the Power Supply .......................................................................................... 8-105
Figure 8-103 Installing the Power Supply ............................................................................................ 8-106

Figure 9-1 System Dimensions (Front View) ....................................................................................... 9-4


Figure 9-2 System Dimensions (Side View) ........................................................................................ 9-5
Figure 9-3 System Dimensions (Top View - Hood Open) .................................................................... 9-6

Figure B-1 Power Manager Connections (10A Power Manager shown) .............................................B-2

xiv © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Table of Contents

Table of Tables
Table 2-1 Recommended Decommissioning Procedures ....................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-2 Laser Fan Width Control Specifications .................................................................................. 2-7
Table 2-3 Safety Warning Labels ............................................................................................................. 2-8
Table 2-4 Beacon Color Indications ....................................................................................................... 2-18

Table 4-1 Genie Camera States .............................................................................................................. 4-3


Table 4-2 Camera Status Indicators ........................................................................................................ 4-3
Table 4-3 Operator Screen Menu Description ......................................................................................... 4-5
Table 4-4 Robot Jog Controls ................................................................................................................ 4-11
Table 4-5 Conveyor Jog Controls .......................................................................................................... 4-13
Table 4-6 Recommended Pressure Settings ......................................................................................... 4-16
Table 4-7 Daily Routine Procedures ...................................................................................................... 4-23

Table 5-1 Conveyor Settings Options .................................................................................................... 5-21


Table 5-2 Inverter Settings ..................................................................................................................... 5-23
Table 5-3 Fan Width Control Configuration Options .............................................................................. 5-27
Table 5-4 Wildcard Characters .............................................................................................................. 5-30

Table 6-1 Routine Maintenance Procedures ........................................................................................... 6-2

Table 7-1 System Power Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 7-2


Table 7-2 System Pneumatic Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 7-3
Table 7-3 Conveyor Troubleshooting....................................................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-4 Vision System Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 7-4

Table 8-1 Spare Parts List ................................................................................................................... 8-107

Table 9-1 Facility Requirements .............................................................................................................. 9-1


Table 9-2 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 9-3
Table 9-3 Stability Analysis ...................................................................................................................... 9-7

Table B-1 Block Diagrams .......................................................................................................................B-1


Table B-2 10A Power Manager Connections...........................................................................................B-3

© 2019 Nordson Corporation xv


1 Introduction
1.1 Overview
The Nordson® ASYMTEK® Select Coat® SL-940 Conformal Coating System is designed to provide the
highest quality and productivity for automated coating processes. The system is available in batch, in-line,
and customized configurations. A variety of fluid systems and applicators increase flexibility in applying
a range of fluids.
This manual is intended primarily as a reference for specially trained process engineers and service
technicians. However, others unfamiliar with Nordson ASYMTEK products may also find this manual
useful as a general introduction to the system. This section covers the following topics:

• Manuals

• Training

• Supported Coating Materials

• Feature Description

• Vision System

• Fluid Systems

• System Features

1.2 System Description


The SL-940 provides consistent, uniform dispensing of a variety of conformal coating materials for both
inline and batch coating applications. These coating systems are high-speed, high-accuracy conformal
coating systems with integrated, closed-loop process control that ensures superior coating quality. Process
parameters are recorded and traceable through EasyCoat® software running on Windows® operating
system. The system can eliminate the requirement for labor-intensive board masking, providing
accurately controlled patterns, film builds, and production flexibility in an automated process. Film
thickness is achieved in a single pass with little or no masking and with virtually no overspray.

1.3 Safety First


Operation of your SL-940 involves heat, air pressure, pneumatic devices, electrical power, mechanical
devices, and the use of hazardous materials. Read this manual in its entirety before attempting any system
or component operation. It is essential for all personnel working on or around the coating system to fully
understand the hazards, risks, and safety precautions associated with operating the system. When properly
operated and maintained, the coating system is safe and reliable. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for additional
information.

WARNING! Consult the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for all fluids used with the coating system.
The SDS provides material usage instructions, disposal instructions, and safety
precautions.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.4 Manuals
The SL-940 arrives with manuals for installation and operation of major system components and
software. For some system components, you may receive Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
manuals. Generally, these OEM manuals are only needed for reference and advanced troubleshooting.
Consult only Nordson ASYMTEK manuals, unless directed to do otherwise by Technical Support or
Nordson ASYMTEK documentation.

1.5 Training
Nordson ASYMTEK offers quality training for all current products on-site and at our Regional Support
Centers around the world. Upon successful completion of the training course, the student is issued a
Certificate of Completion.
In addition, we offer training for products no longer sold, but currently supported. Training for products
no longer sold is performed at your site, on your equipment. We do not offer training for products no
longer supported.
Training courses for current products are held at the Nordson ASYMTEK headquarters in Carlsbad,
California, USA and in Amherst, Ohio and are conducted in a classroom and lab environment. On-site
training at a Nordson facility offers several benefits: students are free from the distractions of work and
get actual hands-on time with the machines. Students rebuild machine subassemblies, troubleshoot real
problems and learn a variety of setup techniques.
Nordson ASYMTEK training for current products is also offered in our worldwide Regional Support
Centers located in Deurne, Netherlands; Seoul, Korea; Taipei, Taiwan; Tokyo, Japan; Shanghai, China;
Penang, Malaysia; and Singapore. Training conducted at these locations is based on equipment
availability. Training in India, Philippines, and Thailand is available through our distributor network only.
To request training, download the “Training Request Form” from the Nordson ASYMTEK website
www.nordsonasymtek.com. Return the completed form to asymtektraining@nordson.com. You will be
contacted within two business days.

1.6 Supported Coating Materials


The SL-940 was designed for dispensing the following materials. Contact Nordson ASYMTEK for
materials not listed.

• Epoxy
• Acrylics
• Silicone
• Urethane

 NOTE Nordson ASYMTEK does not supply conformal coating materials. Consult the
manufacturers Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for all fluids used with the coating system. The
SDS provides material usage, disposal and safety information.

1-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.7 Feature Description


The SL-940 can be customized to fit your needs. It is available with or without heat, with or without a
conveyor and with manual or electronic pressure regulators. Available features are listed below.

1.7.1 Computer System


The computer system consists of a laptop computer with a Windows operating system and EasyCoat
software. The computer arm is adjustable in height and right/left orientation.

1.7.2 EasyCoat Software


Nordson ASYMTEK's EasyCoat software provides precise conformal coating with process controls and
traceability for conformal coating systems. This software enables quick and accurate programming within
a standard Windows environment. Key features include:

• Off-Line Programming
• Masking
• Traceability
• Graphical Interface
• SMEMA Compatible System Interface

1.7.3 Bar Code Recognition System


The bar code recognition system uses a bar code or data matrix label mounted on the workpiece to select
the appropriate coating program or sequence. The scanner reads the label, selects the associated program
or sequence within the EasyCoat software and then executes the program or sequence.

1.7.4 Light Beacon


The light beacon displays system status and is located at the top right corner of the system. It has four
different colored lights that can be constantly ON or flashing and has an audible alarm. Refer to
2.16 Light Beacon for an explanation of each color indication.

1.7.5 Board Present Sensor


The board present sensor, mounted on the robot, registers the presence or absence of a workpiece prior to
dispensing. It initiates the coating sequence only when a workpiece is in place. The board present sensor
is ideal for production environments where carriers are manually loaded. If a carrier is not fully loaded,
the system will detect the empty space and not dispense at that location.

1.7.6 Brush Box


The brush box mounts to the conveyor and is used to clean the dispensing nozzle. The brush box performs
best with solvent-based materials but can also be used with non-solvent-based fluids. At programmed
intervals, the nozzle tip moves back and forth in the solvent against the bristles to remove accumulated
material.

1.7.7 Conveyor
The conveyor transports the workpiece into and out of the coating system. Operation of the conveyor is
automatic during production runs. The conveyor features two board pinning clamps that locate the
workpiece in terms of X/Y location and rotation. The system can be configured with an optional pre-
queue and post-queue board stations that allows simultaneous moving of workpieces in and out of the
work area.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.7.8 Dual Simultaneous Applicator Capability


The dual simultaneous mounting bracket, mounted on the robot, doubles dispensing capability by
accommodating two identical applicators side by side for simultaneous dispensing of a single fluid. The
two applicators are controlled independently by EasyCoat. The system is configured for your specific
application.

1.7.9 Dual Toggle Applicator Capability


The dual toggle mounting bracket, mounted on the robot, typically uses an SC-300/SC-350, SC-105, or
SC-205 Film Coater plus a needle type dispensing valve (such as Nordson ASYMTEK’s SC-400, DV-03,
DV-05, or DV-09) to separately coat broad areas of the board, as well as areas requiring smaller amounts
of coating material. The system is configured for your specific application.

1.7.10 Electronic Pressure (E/P) Regulator


The electronic pressure regulator controls the fluid pressure through the EasyCoat software to ensure
optimal performance. The E/P regulator is required for heated fluid systems and fan width control.

1.7.11 Fluid Filter


The fluid filter strains out particles that may clog the fluid system.

1.7.12 Fluid Regulator


The fluid regulator is inserted directly into the fluid line to improve the response time when changing the
fluid pressure.

1.7.13 In-Cell Inverter


The In-Cell Inverter rotates the product to enable the coating of the second side. In-Cell Inverters are
available for both single and dual lane conveyors.

1.7.14 Laser Fan Width Control System


Laser fan width control provides closed-loop monitoring of the conformal coating process. The system
automatically verifies and adjusts the fan width prior to and/or after the coating operation. Fan width
programming is done through the EasyCoat software.

1.7.15 Laser Pointer Programming Tool


The laser pointer programming tool projects a red dot onto the workpiece, which simulates the center
point of the dispensing module for faster identification of coating begin and end points. The EasyCoat
software automatically compensates for the offset of the laser pointer-to-dispense-module centerline. The
laser pointer programming tool is factory configured at the time of system manufacture and reduces
programming time for faster production ramps.

1.7.16 Low Air Pressure Sensor


The low air pressure sensor is connected to the main air inlet. If the pressure drops below a set point, it
triggers the coating system safety interlock. This feature is used to alert the operator of pressure drop
conditions that may occur in large facilities with several pneumatic devices.

1-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.7.17 Low Fluid Sensor (for external reservoir)


The low fluid sensor triggers a light beacon display and software warning message when the level of
coating material is low. The sensor can be set to a level that provides ample time to refill the reservoir
before reaching an out-of-material condition. The low fluid sensor is located within the external reservoir
and is used for fluids that allow direct sensor immersion.

1.7.18 Low Fluid Scale


The low fluid scale detects a low fluid condition by weighing the fluid reservoir. If the weight drops
below a preset value, a sensor triggers the light beacon display and the software issues a warning
message. The sensor can be set to a level that provides ample time to refill the reservoir before reaching
an out-of-material condition. The low fluid scale is used for fluids where direct contact with the sensor is
not feasible.

1.7.19 Low Solvent Cup Sensor


The low solvent cup sensor triggers a light beacon display and software warning message when the level
of solvent in the cup is low. The software timer can be set to a level that provides ample time to refill the
cup before reaching an out-of-solvent condition.

1.7.20 Material Change Over System


This option allows you to manually switch air and fluid lines between two reservoirs and the fluid system
without physically disconnecting fittings and hoses. The material change over system consists of tubing,
manually operated valves, controls, an extra reservoir, and all the fittings required for self-contained
material change over. The system allows you to switch from the use of coating material to solvent for
flushing the fluid lines and coating applicator during extended shutdown.

1.7.21 Pre-Queue and Post-Queue Board Stations


The pre-queue and post-queue board stations allows simultaneous moving of workpieces in and out of the
work area.

1.7.22 Qadence Flow Control


The Qadence closed loop flow control product measures a volumetric rate of conformal coating material
dispensed on a printed circuit board and will adjust fluid pressure to keep the volume per product within
specification limits.

1.7.23 Safety Interlock


An interlock sensor detects if the dispensing area hood is open or closed. If the dispensing area hood is
opened when a program is running, all dispensing motion stops to protect the operator from injury. A
second interlock sensor is located behind the spill pan to ensure an appropriate ventilation path when the
drawer is pulled out for maintenance.

1.7.24 Solvent Cups


The SL-940 has two 125 ml stainless steel cups that are installed on separate brackets mounted to the
front conveyor rail. One cup holds solvent for cleaning the dispensing needle. A second cup is used for
the purging of conformal coating fluid.

1.7.25 Tooling Plate


The tooling plate secures the workpiece for batch system operations.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.7.26 Tooling Rails


The adjustable tooling rails secure the workpiece for batch system operations.

1.7.27 Upstream and Downstream SMEMA Sensors


The upstream and downstream SMEMA sensors allow you to manually load and unload workpieces onto
the conveyor in the absence of upstream or downstream equipment.

1.7.28 Ultraviolet (UV) Light


The UV light is used to view fluids that contain UV tracers.

1.7.29 Ventilation System


The SL-940 features downdraft ventilation with a redundant safety vent switch to remove vapors from the
dispensing area. A customer supplied air duct must be connected from the coating system to the facility
air exhaust system for the system to operate. Refer to 3.12 Connecting Power and Air Supply.

1.8 Vision System


The vision system includes a digital camera, light source, and a laptop computer. It allows the
programmer to teach dispensing locations on the substrate using the EasyCoat software. The programmer
views a live image of the camera’s target and uses the graphical user interface to create the coating
sequence.

1.8.1 Teach Camera


The vision system with teach camera is the optimal on-line programming tool when using an actual part
and makes teaching easier and more accurate. It enables quick and precise programming by simulating the
position of the installed applicators.

1.8.2 Fiducial Find Camera


The SL-940 vision system with fiducial find camera and pattern recognition system locates fiducial or
skip marks based on taught reference. It automatically corrects workpiece misalignment and process
dependencies.

1.9 Fluid Systems


Depending on system configuration, the following coating applicators are available:

• SC-104/105HS Film Coater


• SC-204/205 HS Non-Circulating Film Coater
• SC-280C
• SC-280N
• SC-300/SC-350 Swirl Coat™ Applicator
• SC-400 Precise Coat Conformal Coating Jet
• SC-400VCS
• SC-400 Dual Simultaneous

1-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.9.1 SC-104HS/SC-105HS Circulating Film Coater


The SC-104HS (4-axis) and SC-105HS (5-axis) apply coatings in a film rather than in an atomized spray
produced by conventional airless spray guns. The SC-104HS consists of an air actuated assembly that
rotates the nozzle from 0-90 degrees. The SC-105HS consists of an air actuated assembly that rotates the
nozzle in 90-degree increments. In addition, the SC-105HS has an air-activated tilt assembly, which
allows the nozzle to be tilted from vertical to 30 degrees from vertical.

1.9.2 SC-204HS/SC-205HS Non-Circulating Film Coater


The SC-204HS (4-axis) and SC-205HS (5-axis) film coaters are used to apply materials that do not
require heating and therefore do not require circulation. The coaters are fitted with a rotating ring
mechanism that rotates the SC-204HS nozzle from 0-90 degrees and the SC-205HS nozzle in 90-degree
increments. In addition, the SC-205HS has an air-activated tilt assembly, which allows the nozzle to be
titled from vertical to 30 degrees from vertical.

1.9.3 SC-280N/SC-280C Non-Circulating/Circulating Film Coater


The Select Coat® Film Coaters SC-280N/SC-280C Non-Circulating/Circulating are designed for use with
low cavity, cross-cut nozzles. The SC-280N is used to apply materials that do not require heating and are
therefore not circulated. The SC-280C is required for materials that do require heating and are circulated.
The coaters are air-actuated and the piston and needle travel is dampened for precise pattern and film-
thickness control.

1.9.4 SC-300/SC-350 Swirl Coat Applicator


The SC-300/SC-350 Swirl Coat applicator offers three modes of operation: bead, monofilament, and
swirl. Ideal for conformal coating applications, the SC-300/SC-350 handles a wide range of materials,
varying in viscosity from 30 to 3500 mPa-sec (30 to 3500 centipoise). The SC-300/SC-350 is designed
for use with solvent-less coatings, supporting environmentally responsible practices. A four-position tilt
accessory is available to allow coating access to vertical sides of components.

1.9.5 SC-400 PreciseCoat Conformal Coating Jet


The SC-400 PreciseCoat Conformal Coating Jet is ideal for applying conformal coating materials to
highly selective areas. This solution is designed for coating small substrates or substrates with high
component density, and when there are tight tolerances between coated and uncoated areas. The
SC-400 jet reaches locations not accessible by other applicators, using a needle design with jetting action
and fast pulse-width modulated control.
1.9.6 Four Position Tilt Accessory
The optional four-position tilt accessory enables the SC-300/SC-350 and SC-400 applicators to coat four
sides of a part or other areas not accessible from the standard vertical approach.
1.9.7 Fifth Position 0-270° Rotate and Tilt Mechanism
The SC-280X Film Coater may be fitted with both a rotate pulley and an air-activated tilt assembly. The
tilt assembly allows the nozzle to be titled from 0-30 degrees.

1.9.8 Viscosity Control System


The Viscosity Control System (VCS) maintains consistent temperature of conformal coating fluids. The
system includes a coating applicator and a heated circulating fluid circuit to eliminate viscosity changes in
temperature-responsive materials. Close-range temperature monitoring keeps the coating process
consistent and stable. By controlling the temperature of the conformal coating fluid circuit, viscosity
fluctuations can be reduced. Additionally, emissions of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) may be
reduced, depending on the fluid properties, by reducing the amount of solvent required to thin the
conformal coating.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10 System Features


The figures in this section show views and features of the coating system. Callouts locate major
components, options, and switches. The numbers associated with the descriptions correspond to the
callout numbers in the illustration. Detailed operating instructions for some of these features are
addressed in other sections of this manual. System features are shown in Figure 1-1 through Figure 1-8.

 NOTE The terms robot and dispensing head are synonymous and are used interchangeably
throughout this manual.

1.10.1 Front View


8

6
5
Figure 1-1A SL-940 Front View

1-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

Figure 1-1B SL-940 Front View (Optional Tooling Rails shown)

Item Name Description


The Front Hood allows the operator to view and access the dispensing area. A
1 Front Hood sensor connects the hood to the safety interlock system. If the hood is opened
when a program is running, all dispensing motion stops.
The coating system features a laptop computer, mounted on an adjustable
2 Laptop Computer
height bracket. The Laptop Computer runs the EasyCoat coating software.
The Front Panel contains the system ON and OFF buttons, the Emergency
Machine Off (EMO) button, the grounding strap connection, and the applicator
3 Front Panel
On/Off button. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for detailed descriptions of front panel
functions (Figure 1-2).
The robot, solvent cups, conveyor, stop pins, and board sensors are all located
4 Coating Area
in the Coating Area. See 1.10.1.2 Coating Area.
The Front Cabinet houses the spill pan, laser fan width control amplifier
5 Front Cabinet
(optional), and the reservoir air pressure regulator (Figure 1-5).
The Levelers are the footpads of the coating system. The Levelers are adjusted
Levelers during installation and should not need attention unless the system is moved to a
6
(Foot Pads) new location. To protect the coating system from moving during an earthquake,
the Levelers can be anchored to the floor. See 2.9 Earthquake Precautions.
7 Conveyor See 1.10.1.3 Conveyor.
The Light Beacon signals the operator of system status by displaying a colored
8 Light Beacon solid or blinking light and/or issuing an audible tone. Refer to Section 2 - Safety
for additional information.
The Tooling Rails are an option and secure the workpiece for batch system
9 Tooling Rails
operations.

Figure 1-1 Front View

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.1.1 Front Panel

 NOTE Refer to Section 2 - Safety for detailed descriptions of all front panel buttons and
functions.

Item Name Description


The Start Button is a push button located on the front panel. It turns on the
power to the coating system. The Start Button glows green when pushed
1 Start Button
and continues to glow until the Stop button or Emergency Machine Off
(EMO) button is pressed.
Grounding straps worn by the operator or technician attach to this
Grounding Strap connector. This prevents Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) damage to
2
Connector workpieces and conformal coating system electronics during coating
operations and servicing.
The Stop Button is a push button located on the front panel. When pushed,
3 Stop Button it stops all power to the conformal coating system, except for the laptop
computer.
Press Applicator ON/OFF to turn the coating applicator on and off. This
4 Applicator ON/OFF feature can be used to test run a program without dispensing fluid
(dry mode).
Activating the Emergency Machine Off (EMO) or E-Stop vents all pressure
in the pneumatic system, de-energizes the robot motors, and cuts power to
Emergency Machine
5 all system components except the laptop computer. An EMO button is
Off (EMO)
located on the front and rear of the conformal coating system. Refer to
Section 2 - Safety for additional information.
Figure 1-2 SL-940 Front Panel

1-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.1.2 Coating Area

4 3

Item Name Description


The Robot moves in the XYZ planes. It is controlled through the coating
1 Robot system software. The coating applicator, camera, laser pointer
programming tool, and board present sensor are mounted on the Robot.
The Camera allows the programmer to teach dispensing locations on the
substrate using the EasyCoat software. The programmer views a live image
2 Camera
of the Camera’s target and uses the graphical user interface to create the
coating sequence.
Conveyor
3 See 1.10.1.3 Conveyor.
(SL-940)
Depending upon your application requirements, the SL-940 Conformal
Conformal Coating
4 Coating System can be configured with any of the Conformal Coating
Applicator
Applicators listed in 1.9 Fluid Systems.

Figure 1-3 Coating Area (SL-940 shown)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.1.3 Conveyor

1
2
3

Item Name Description


A Conveyor is standard on the SL-940 Conformal Coating System. All
1 Conveyor Conveyors are SMEMA-compatible. The Conveyor is controlled through the
EasyCoat software.
Mounted on the conveyor rail within the dispense zone, the Board Sensor
detects the presence of a workpiece entering the system. The signal is sent
2 Board Sensor
to the conveyor controller, which halts conveyor motion and lowers stop
pins to hold the part in place for dispensing.
The Stop Pin is a pneumatic device used to stop workpieces as they are
3 Stop Pin
conveyed into the system.
The SL-940 inline system has two 125 ml stainless steel cups that are
installed on separate brackets mounted to the front conveyor rail. One cup
4 Solvent Cups
holds solvent for cleaning the dispensing needle. A second cup is used for
the purging of conformal coating fluid.

Pneumatically actuated Board Pins lower into holes in the board to secure it
5 Board Pins
precisely in place for accurate fluid dispensing.

Figure 1-4 SL-940 Conveyor

1-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.1.4 Front Cabinet

4 3

Item Name Description


Reservoir Pressure The Reservoir Pressure Gauge displays the air pressure supplied to the
1
Gauge fluid reservoir and solvent reservoir.
Reservoir Pressure The Reservoir Pressure Regulator controls the air supplied to the fluid
2
Regulator reservoir and solvent reservoir.
Laser Fan Width Laser Fan Width Control provides closed-loop control of the conformal
3 Control Amplifier coating process, automatically compensating for variables within the
(optional) process environment that can affect fluid fan width.
The USB Hub distributes USB information from the computer to the main
4 USB Hub
PWA, conveyor PWA, and other components.
Computer Power
5 The Computer Power Supply supplies power to the laptop computer.
Supply
The Spill Pan protects the dispensing system from fluid spills and
6 Spill Pan overspray. The Spill Pan is removable for ease of cleaning and is
interlocked for safety.

Figure 1-5 Front Cabinet

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.2 Rear View

2 1

Figure 1-6A

1-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

6 10

11
7

12

9
Figure 1-6B

Item Name Description


Electronic/Pneumatic
1 Allows access to the system electronics and pneumatics.
Enclosure
2 Main Air Inlet Connects the coating system to the facility air supply.
Fluid System Houses the purge valve, circulation valve, pump, filter assembly, fluid
3
Enclosure regulator, and fluid heater.
Main Power Circuit Controls all electrical power to the entire system including the coating
4
Breaker system and laptop computer.
Connects the main power cord from the facility source to the coating
5 Main Power Inlet
system.
Regulates air pressure supplied to the coating system through the main
6 Main Air Regulator
air inlet.
Displays the air pressure to which the main air regulator is set. The
7 Main Air Gauge
recommended setting is 551 to 620 kPa (80 to 90 psi).
Activating the EMO vents all pressure in the pneumatic system, de-
energizes the robot motors, and cuts power to all system components
8 Rear EMO
except the computer and monitor. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for additional
information.
Used to switch between a fluid reservoir and solvent reservoir and toggle
Material Change
9 the air supplied between the reservoirs. Also houses the circulation valve
Over Panel
and purge valve for the Viscosity Control System option.
Reservoir Air
10 Toggles the air supplied to Reservoir A and Reservoir B.
Pressure Switch
SMEMA Downstream Allows for SMEMA communication between the coating system and a
11
Connection downstream machine such as an unloader.
SMEMA Upstream Allows for SMEMA communication between the coating system and an
12
Connection upstream machine such as a loader.

Figure 1-6 Rear View

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-15


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.2.1 Fluid System

Below are functional descriptions of SL-940 components shown in Figure 1-7.

3
7

4
5 6

Figure 1-7A Heated Circulating Fluid System (VCS System Shown)

1-16 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

5 6

Figure 1-7B Non-Circulating Fluid System

Item Name Description


The Diaphragm Pump is an air-operated, reciprocating pump. It is a 1:1
Pump, operating up to 689 kPa (100 psi). Air pressure to the Pump is
1 Pump
directly supplied from the main air supply of the SL-940 Conformal Coating
System.
The Purge Valve is used to purge air out of a circulating fluid system. It
2 Purge Valve bypasses the circulation valve and is generally used at system startup and
after a fluid change.
3 Circulation Valve The Circulation Valve controls the amount of flow of the circulation loop.
The Fluid Regulator is an air-piloted regulator controlling the fluid pressure
4 Fluid Regulator
via the software controlled electro-pneumatic air regulator.
The Filter Drain Valve bypasses the fluid system and is only opened
5 Filter Drain Valve when draining/cleaning the filter or while priming the system of air. It is
normally closed (horizontal) during operation.
The Filter Assembly blocks small particles in the conformal coating fluid
6 Filter Assembly
from clogging the coating applicator.
The Fluid Heater controls the fluid temperature through the EasyCoat
7 Fluid Heater
software.

Figure 1-7 Fluid System (Rear View)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1-17


SL-940 IOM Manual Introduction

1.10.2.2 Rear Cabinet

Below are functional descriptions of SL-940 components shown in Figure 1-8.

Item Name Description


1 Servo Power Supply The Servo Power Supply supplies 48 VDC to the Servo PWA.
The 10A Power Manager is located inside the rear cabinet and houses the
2 10A Power Manager main circuit breaker and the main power inlet. It supplies power to various
coating system components.
3 Main Power Inlet Connects the coating system to the facility power source.
Main Power Circuit Controls all electrical power to the entire system including the coating
4
Breaker system and laptop computer.

Figure 1-8 Rear Cabinet

1-18 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


2 Safety

2.1 Overview
This section is intended to provide basic safety information necessary for operating and servicing the
Select Coat SL-940 Conformal Coating System. This section covers the following topics:

• System Use • Safety Warning Labels

• Basic Safety Precautions and Practices • Residual Safety Risks

• Decommissioning • Emergency Shutdown

• Disposal • Interlock

• Lifting and Transport Precautions • Service Shutdown

• Laser Radiation • Lockout of Electrical and Pneumatic Energy

• Earthquake Precautions • Light Beacon


To further optimize safe coating system operation, precautions and recommended practices are included
with the procedures throughout this manual.

WARNING! Unsafe equipment conditions can result in personal injury or property damage.
Failure to properly operate and maintain the system in accordance with this
manual could cause the built-in safety features to be ineffective.

 NOTE Safety is considered a joint responsibility between the original equipment manufacturer
(Nordson ASYMTEK) and the end-user (owner). All safety precautions and practices
should be in accordance with local regulations and facility policy.

2.2 Facility Requirements


To ensure optimal performance and safety, it is necessary to install the coating system in a facility that
meets the necessary requirements. See 9.2 Facility Requirements. If you have any questions, please
contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.

2.3 System Use


2.3.1 Intended Use
Use of Nordson ASYMTEK equipment in ways other than those described in the documentation supplied
with the equipment may result in injury to persons or damage to property.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.3.2 Misuse
Some examples of misuse of the equipment include:

• Using incompatible materials

• Making unauthorized modifications

• Removing or bypassing safety guards or interlocks

• Using incompatible or damaged parts

• Using unapproved auxiliary equipment

• Operating equipment in excess of maximum ratings

2.4 Basic Safety Precautions and Practices


Compliance with the following recommended precautions and practices reduces the risk of personal
injury or damage to property during SL-940 Conformal Coating System operation and maintenance.

WARNING! Failure to comply with any of the safety recommendations could cause serious
injury to the user or damage to the coating system.

2.4.1 Safety of Personnel


• Only trained personnel should be permitted to perform operation, maintenance, and
troubleshooting procedures.

• There should always be a second person present when performing maintenance on a system
that is powered up.

• Locate, identify, and obey all safety warning labels on your system before initial use. See
2.10 Safety Warning Labels for details.

• Immediately push the red Emergency Machine Off (EMO) button if personnel are in danger
of being injured.

• Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) power and disconnect facility air to the coating system before
performing service or maintenance on the coating system. See 2.15 Lockout of Electrical
and Pneumatic Energy for details.

• Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) power to upstream and downstream machines before performing


service or maintenance on the coating system.

• Unplug power source before performing service or maintenance on the coating system.

• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry while operating the system. Tie back long hair to
prevent it from being caught in moving parts.

• Do not touch the dispensing head (robot), conveyor, or other moving parts while the coating
system is operating.

2-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

• To prevent burn injury, wear thermal gloves when working around heater tooling and fluid
heaters.

• If your system is equipped with Laser Fan Width Control, use extreme care to avoid looking
directly at the laser beam or its reflection off mirror-like surfaces. See 2.8 Laser Radiation.

• Make sure the main power cable and main air supply hose are securely connected before
operating the coating system.

• If in a confined room, ensure adequate and uninterrupted air ventilation, heating, and
cooling to meet environmental stress limits of personnel and the coating system.

• Where Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions can exceed safe limits, facility
ventilation and filtration systems must be operational.

• Provide adequate space around the coating system to allow for movement of maintenance
and service personnel. Allow space for access doors and service panels to open fully.

• Make sure all facility power sources are safely grounded.

• Routinely inspect all air hoses and electrical cables for damage.

• Make sure power cords and air supply hoses do not cross a walkway or aisle.

• Before attempting to lift a load, take into consideration facility lifting and transport
precautions. See 2.7 Lifting and Transport Precautions.

• Maintain a clean and orderly work area.

2.4.2 Material Safety


• Follow Safety Data Sheet (SDS) recommendations for the proper handling, cleanup, and
disposal of all materials and fluids and their containers (i.e., syringes, cups, reservoirs, etc.)
used with the coating system.
• Obtain the SDS from the applicable chemical supplier for chemical substances not provided
with the equipment. These chemical substances include those used for processing,
maintenance, and service of the equipment.
• Follow SDS recommendations for the proper handling and disposal of all materials used for
cleaning coating equipment and spills.

• Make sure the coating system ventilation is ON during handling and cleanup of all materials
used with the coating system.

• Know the SDS recommendations for treatment of injury resulting from exposure to
hazardous materials. See 2.4.4 High-Pressure Fluids.

• Always wear appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) as recommended by facility


safety practices and the material manufacturer’s SDS.

• When working with multiple fluids, refer to the SDS to ensure the materials are compatible.

• If possible, save or recycle unused materials. Refer to the SDS before saving or recycling
unused materials.

• DO NOT dispense toxic fluids (materials with a TLV of 200 ppm or lower).

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.4.3 Preventing Coating System and Workpiece Damage


• Immediately push the EMO button if coating system or a workpiece is in danger of
being damaged.

• Use standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions when working near sensitive
components. Always wear a grounding strap and connect it to the ESD ground before
handling workpieces.

• Immediately contain and clean up any caustic or conductive fluid spills as recommended in
the material manufacturer’s SDS. If fluid gets into internal portions of the machine,
immediately contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.

• Follow all recommended system maintenance procedures.

• Always keep the dispensing area clear of any fallen workpieces or obstacles.

• Ensure that no air intake or exhaust grilles are blocked when the system is in operation.

2.4.4 High-Pressure Fluids


High-pressure fluids, unless they are safely contained, are extremely hazardous. Always relieve fluid
pressure before adjusting or servicing high-pressure equipment. Fluids penetrating the skin can cause
toxic poisoning. If you suffer a fluid injection injury, seek medical care immediately. If possible, provide
a copy of the SDS for the injected fluid to the health care provider.

2.4.5 Halogenated Hydrocarbon Solvent Hazards


Do not use halogenated hydrocarbon solvents in a pressurized system that contains aluminum
components. Under pressure, these solvents can react with aluminum and explode, causing injury, death,
or property damage. Halogenated hydrocarbon solvents contain one or more of the following elements:

Element Symbol Prefix


Fluorine F “Fluoro-”
Chlorine Cl “Chloro-”
Bromine Br “Bromo-”
Iodine I “Iodo-”

2-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.5 Decommissioning
The SL-940 coating system should provide you with years of safe and reliable service. When it is
necessary to decommission the system, the components should be dispositioned as specified in
Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Recommended Decommissioning Procedures


Component Disposition
Aluminum Parts Recycle aluminum panels, shelves, doors, and hardware.
Steel Parts Recycle any steel parts.
Copper Wiring Recycle any copper wiring.
Electronic Components Discard in accordance with local safety/environmental regulations.
Recycle or discard in accordance with local safety/environmental
Pneumatic Components
regulations.
Printed Circuit Boards Discard in accordance with local safety/environmental regulations.
Recycle or discard in accordance with local safety/environmental
Plastics
regulations.

2.6 Disposal
Dispose of equipment and materials used in operation and servicing in accordance with local regulations.
Depending on the fluid dispensed and cleaning materials used, the following items may contain
substances whose disposal might be regulated:

• Solvent Cups

• Nozzles/Extensions

• Seats

• Luer Fittings

• Fluid Tubes

• Syringes

• Conveyor Belts

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.7 Lifting and Transport Precautions


2.7.1 Considerations
Before attempting to lift a load, personnel should take into consideration the following factors:

• Does the load display a lift hazard warning label as shown below?

• Is lifting and transporting equipment available that might make the task safer and easier?

• Do you need to use personal protective equipment such as back supports and work gloves?

• Do you need an assistant to help you lift or guide the load?

• Do you know the destination for the load and the route you must follow?

• Has the load been prepared for lifting (doors closed, facility cables/air lines disconnected,
loose items secured, earthquake-bolts removed)?

2.7.2 Precautions
When lifting, transporting, and lowering heavy or large loads, personnel should observe the following
precautions:

• Stand close to the load to be lifted and place your feet at shoulder width.

• Firmly grip the load and bring the load close to your body.

• Lift your head and shoulders first and with your back straight, use the strength of your legs
to slowly and smoothly raise yourself up.

• DO NOT twist your body. Change direction by first moving your feet.

• When transporting the load on a cart or a lifting device, reduce back strain by pushing rather
than pulling the load.

• When lowering the load, bend your knees, lower it slowly and smoothly, and keep your
fingers out from under the load.

2-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.8 Laser Radiation


The optional Laser Fan Width Control uses a Class 2 laser sensor. The following safety precautions
should be observed in addition to the standard coating system safety precautions.

• Operate the Laser Fan Width Control only according to the procedures described in the
instructions included. Failure to do so may result in injury due to exposure to the laser
beam.

• DO NOT look directly at the laser beam.

WARNING! Looking directly at the laser beam may result in serious eye injury.

 NOTE The laser beam is not harmful to the skin. There is no danger in exposing arms or hands
to the beam. The only possible health hazard is in exposing the eyes to the laser beam.

Table 2-2 Laser Fan Width Control Specifications


ORGANIZATION CLASSIFICATION
FDA CLASS II
IEC 60825-1 1998-01 CLASS 2
DIN EN 60825-1 1998-01 KLASSE 2

2.9 Earthquake Precautions


The conformal coating system must be secured to prevent movement that could cause injury to
personnel and damage to the coating system and facility in the event of an earthquake. Each coating
system leveler (foot) should be anchored to the floor. See 3.11 Anchoring the Coating System.
As a safety precaution, all hazardous electrical and pneumatic energy is automatically bled out of the
system if electrical power is lost.

WARNING! All personnel should follow facility earthquake safety guidelines.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.10 Safety Warning Labels


Safety warning labels on the SL-940 Conformal Coating System point out areas where personnel must
use extreme caution to prevent serious injury and property damage. Table 2-3 shows the warning labels
that may be found on your coating system or optional equipment. The location of warning labels found on
a typical SL-940 is shown in Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-6.

WARNING! Comply with all safety warning labels or serious injury to personnel or damage to
the coating system may occur. Worn or damaged labels should be replaced with
new labels having the same part number.

 NOTE Triangular labels with symbols only are placed on machines that are shipped to the
European community, referred to as “CE labeled” machines. Rectangular labels with
symbols and text are placed on machines that are shipped outside the European
community.

Table 2-3 Safety Warning Labels


Label/ Part
Warning Type Hazard
Symbol Number

Clean Dry Air Warns that the water traps must be connected
7241298
Required to clean dry air.

7219555
Consult
Warns personnel to read the Technical Manual
Technical
before operating the machine.
Manual 7206854

Warns personnel of a high-voltage component


7243245 that can cause shock, burn, or death.
Electrical Use extreme caution when working in or
(Shock Hazard) around these areas.
7257510 Disconnect and lock out power
before servicing.

Emergency This symbol is located on the Emergency


Machine Off --- Machine Off Buttons located on the front and
Symbol back of the coating system.
This label identifies a component that requires
special attention. May cause serious bodily
General harm to the user.
7275803
Warning
Disconnect and lock out power
before servicing.
Warns of moving parts that can cause serious
Hand injury to hands and fingers.
Entanglement/ 7214364
Moving Material Disconnect and lock out power
before servicing.

2-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

Table 2-3 Safety Warning Labels (Continued)


Label/ Part
Warning Type Hazard
Symbol Number

7207207 Warns personnel of potentially hot components


and surfaces. Use extreme caution when
Hot Surface working on or around these areas.
7207206 Can cause severe burns.

6113313 Warns personnel of the possibility of


Laser Radiation hazardous radiation exposure if your system is
(Class 2) equipped with a Class 2 Laser Height Sensor
7201438 or other Class 2 laser device.

198883
Warns personnel of moving parts that can
cause serious injury to hands or fingers. Keep
Moving Parts hands away from moving parts.
12426
Present
Disconnect and lock out power before
servicing.
7253636

This label warns that the pressure relief valve


Pressure Relief should be pulled before performing service on
322352
Warning the pneumatic system or opening the fluid
reservoir.
This label warns of the presence of ultraviolet
radiation.
UV Radiation 7269666
Protect eyes and skin from exposure to UV
light.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

Item Description
1 Read Manual Label (Front Hood)
Figure 2-1 Safety Warning Labels - Front View

Item Description
1 Laser Radiation Warning Label
Figure 2-2 Safety Warning Labels - Laser Fan Width Control

2-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

1 1
Item Description
1 Moving Parts Present
Figure 2-3 Safety Warning Labels - Conveyor

2 3

Item Description
1 Hand Entanglement Labels
2 Hot Surface Label
3 Electrical Warning Label

Figure 2-4 Safety Warning Labels - Rear View

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

Item Description
1 UV Warning Label
Figure 2-5 Safety Warning Labels - UV
2

Item Description
1 Electrical Warning Label
2 General Warning Label

Figure 2-6 Safety Warning Labels - Power Manager

2-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.11 Residual Safety Risks


Safety Hazard Risk Area
A hand crush or pinch point hazard is created by 1
the movement of the conveyor. DO NOT reach
into the conveyor while the system is operating.
Keep hands away from this area unless the
system power is off.

If the system is configured with a heated fluid


system, a high risk burn hazard is created by the
heaters. Keep hands away from this area unless
the system power is off and heaters have cooled. 1

A hand entanglement hazard is created by the 1


movement of the drive cables and motor pulley.
DO NOT remove the access panels while the
system is operating. DO NOT bypass the safety
interlock. DO NOT operate the equipment with
the access panels removed and/or doors open.
Keep hands away from this area unless the
system power is off.

If the system is equipped with Laser Fan Width


Control, serious eye injury may occur by staring 4
directly into the laser beam. DO NOT bypass
the safety interlock. DO NOT open the hatch
while the laser is on. Wear protective goggles
when using the Laser Fan Width Control. See
2.8 Laser Radiation.
If the system is equipped with a UV light,
serious eye injury may occur by staring directly 5
into light. Protect eyes and skin from exposure
to UV light.

Item Description Item Description


1 Conveyor Pinch Point 4 Laser Fan Width Control Laser Beam
2 Heated Fluid System 5 UV Light
3 Drive Cables and Motor Pulley

Figure 2-7 SL-940 Safety Hazard Areas

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.12 Emergency Shutdown


In the event of an emergency or malfunction, press the EMO (E-Stop) button. The SL-940 has two EMO
buttons. The EMO buttons are the large red buttons located on the front panel and the rear of the coating
system (Figure 2-9A). Activating the EMO vents all pressure in the pneumatic system and cuts power to
all components except the laptop computer.

TIP If the operator or technician is unable to reach the EMO button, the main circuit breaker,
which is located on the back of the system (Figure 2-9B), can be used for emergency
shutdown, but doing this will also shut down the laptop computer.

1 2
Figure 2-8A EMO (E-Stop) Buttons

Figure 2-9B Main Circuit Breaker

Item Description
1 Front EMO
2 Rear EMO
3 Main Circuit Breaker
Figure 2-9 EMO/Main Circuit Breaker Locations

2-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.12.1 Emergency Shutdown Situations


As a minimum, activate the EMO in the following situations:

WARNING! In an emergency, failure to completely shut down power to the coating system
with the EMO can cause serious injury to the user and/or damage to the coating
system.

• If anyone is in immediate danger of being injured by moving parts, hazardous materials, or


electrical shock.

• If valuable coating system components or the workpieces are in danger of being damaged.
This can include:
- Physical damage to the dispensing valve or workpiece by unexpected dispensing
head movement.
- Electrical damage to the coating system.

2.12.2 Emergency Shutdown Recovery

WARNING! Do not restart the dispensing operation until the condition that caused the
emergency shutdown has been corrected. Failure to comply could cause serious
injury to the user and/or serious damage to the coating system.

 NOTE If the main circuit breaker has been tripped, you will need to restart the coating system as
specified in 4.3 Powering on the Coating System.
To recover after an emergency shutdown:
1. Open the hood and clear the conveyor of all workpieces.
2. Locate and remedy the cause of the emergency shutdown. If necessary, refer to
Section 2 - Safety.
3. Close the front hood.
4. Turn the EMO knob clockwise until it pops back into position.
5. Press the Start (I) button on the front panel.
6. Restart your coating program. See 4.16 Loading a Program and 4.17 Running a Program.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-15


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.13 Interlock
The interlock is an electronic connection that immediately cuts the power to any motion and pneumatic
actuators. If the dispensing area hood is opened during dispensing, the interlock is activated and all
dispensing activity immediately stops to protect the operator from injury. There is a second interlock
device inside the front cabinet on the spill pan to ensure an appropriate ventilation path when the drawer
is pulled out for maintenance.

2.13.1 Interlock Recovery


When an interlock shutdown occurs, the motor power turns OFF. The program WILL NOT resume from
where it stopped.
To recover from a shutdown triggered by the interlock:
1. Close the dispensing area hood.
2. Restart the dispensing program. See 4.16 Loading a Program and 4.17 Running a Program.

2.14 Service Shutdown


Before performing any service or parts replacement, the coating system should be shut down for service:
To shut down for service:
1. Shutdown the coating system as described in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Perform a “Lockout/Tagout of Electrical and Pneumatic Energy” as described below.

2.15 Lockout of Electrical and Pneumatic Energy


Companies may differ in their Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) procedures and requirements, and it is the
responsibility of the end user to determine compliance with local safety procedures. The purpose of any
LOTO effort is to help avoid injury or coating system damage due to unexpected energizing of
equipment, start up, or the release of stored energy during repair, maintenance, and operation of
equipment. Situations where LOTO practices may be employed on the SL-940 include:

• Adjusting cables, belts, pulleys, or moving parts

• Servicing bearings or motors

• Troubleshooting, servicing, or replacing electronic components or assemblies


Situations where LOTO practices might not be required are when troubleshooting electrical, pneumatic,
or hydraulic components or assemblies that make de-energizing the whole system impractical.
Troubleshooting or servicing the SL-940 while powered up and operating should only be accomplished
by fully trained and qualified personnel. There should always be a second person present when
performing maintenance on a system under power.

2-16 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

To lockout/tagout the electrical and pneumatic energy:


1. Turn the main power circuit breaker on the rear of the system to the OFF (0) position.
2. Unplug the main power cable from the back of the power manager.
3. Rotate the main air pressure knob counterclockwise until the gauge registers 0 psi and then
disconnect the main air supply by the quick release fitting.
4. Install an approved, keyed lock on the locking flange of the main circuit breaker so it cannot
be turned on and attach an approved tag.

 Ensure that the owner, date, reason, and estimated time for repair are clearly marked on
the tag.
5. Install an approved lockout clamp and keyed lock onto the power connector so it cannot be
reconnected to the power manager and attach an approved tag (Figure 2-10).

 Ensure that the owner, date, reason, and estimated time to repair are clearly marked on
the tag.
6. Install an approved lockout clamp and keyed lock onto the pneumatic fitting so it cannot be
reconnected to the main air regulator and attach an approved tag.

 Ensure the owner, date, reason, and estimated time to repair are clearly marked on the
tag (Figure 2-11).

 NOTE Warning tags document the name of the technician taking the equipment out of operation,
the date, and other facility-required information. It is a warning that the equipment cannot
be put back into operation until the authorized technician has removed the tag.

Figure 2-10 Lockout of Electrical Power Figure 2-11 Lockout of Pneumatic Pressure

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 2-17


SL-940 IOM Manual Safety

2.16 Light Beacon


The light beacon is a device that displays system status and can warn the operator when fault conditions
exist. The light beacon has red, yellow, green, and blue lights that can be solid or flashing. The light
beacon also has an audible alarm. Table 2-4 provides possible reasons for each color indication.
Software and hardware share control of the beacon lights. Sometimes, hardware-driven displays override
those caused by software conditions and sometimes software-driven displays override those caused
hardware conditions. Safety critical conditions always have priority. Flashing light software commands
have priority over solid light commands.

 NOTE Refer to Section 2 - Safety for suggested recovery from common fault conditions.

Table 2-4 Beacon Color Indications

Beacon Color System Status


ALERT
All motion, outputs, dispensing valve, and motion controls are disabled until
the fault is cleared.
One of the following conditions may exist:
A. Solid - Emergency stop condition.
B. Flashing - Exhaust failure. Loss of power to machine. Software driven
error message is displayed on the computer monitor.
RED
C. Solid or Flashing - Software has been configured to display a solid or
flashing red light.
CAUTION
System in a low power state or lacks sufficient air pressure.
One of the following conditions may exist:
A. Solid - Door is open (Interlock activated).
B. Solid or Flashing - Software has been configured to display a solid or
YELLOW flashing yellow light.
OPERATION
One of the following conditions may exist:
A. Solid - The system is fully operational with the door closed.
B. Solid or Flashing - Software has been configured to display a solid or
flashing green light.
GREEN

USER DEFINED
A. Solid - When low fluid is detected.
B. Flashing - Software has been configured to display a flashing blue light.

BLUE

2-18 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


3 Installation
3.1 Overview
This section describes installation procedures for the Select Coat SL-940 Conformal Coating System and
covers the following topics:

• Uncrating and Placing the Coating System • Installing the Optional Genie Camera

• Unpacking the Coating Area • Anchoring the Coating System

• Leveling the Coating System • Connecting Power and Air Supply

• Installing the Light Beacon • EasyCoat Installation

• Installing the Laptop Computer

3.2 Safety First


Operation of the SL-940 Conformal Coating System involves heat, air pressure, electrical power,
mechanical devices, and the use of hazardous materials. It is essential that every person servicing or
operating the coating system fully understands all hazards, risks, and safety precautions. Refer to
Section 2 - Safety. for additional information.

WARNING! The procedures in this section should only be performed by a trained service
technician.

3.3 Facility Requirements


To ensure optimal performance and safety, it is necessary to install the coating system in a facility that
meets the necessary requirements. If you have any questions about facility requirements, please contact
Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support. See 9.4 Specifications for detailed information.

3.4 Tools and Materials Needed


• 1/2-inch Wrench • Band Cutter

• 9/16-inch Wrench • Phillips Screwdriver (included in tool kit)

• Personal Protective Equipment • 1 1/2-inch Wrench (included in tool kit)

• Hammer • Forklift

• Flat Bar • Level

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

3.5 Uncrating and Placing the Coating System


To uncrate and place the coating system:
1. Check the “Tip & Tell” and "Shockwatch" devices, both on the outside of the shipping crate
and on the coating system, to make sure that the coating system has not been dropped or
tipped. If any of these devices has been activated, contact Nordson ASYMTEK.
2. Locate and remove the envelope on the outside of the shipping crate. Open the envelope
and locate the shipping list.

 As you unpack each item inside of the box, identify the item, locate it on the shipping
list, and place a checkmark next to the item.
3. Referring to the uncrating instruction sheet, use the flat bar and hammer or a drill to remove
the lid and sides of the crate.

WARNING! Personnel should wear gloves and safety glasses while removing the top and
sides of the crate. Sufficient personnel should be used to lift and control the crate
to prevent serious injury to personnel or damage to the coating system.

4. Remove the four (4) machine-to-crate shipping brackets attached to the pallet using a
1/2-inch wrench and 9/16-inch wrench (not provided).
5. Remove the two (2) 1/2-inch hex head screws clamping the four shipping brackets to the
levelers.

1 6
7

3 4

Item Description Item Description


1 Foot Restraint Bracket 5 Lag Bolts and Washers
2 Hex Head Screws and Washers 6 Hex Nuts and Washers
3 Leveler (foot) 7 Post Nut
4 Machine-to-Crate Shipping Bracket 8 Lock Nut
Figure 3-1 Removing the Shipping Brackets

3-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

6. When the four (4) shipping brackets have been removed, slide the forklift forks under the
front of the coating system between the levelers (feet). Use the forklift to gently lift the
coating system off the crate.

 You may use the shipping crate for future shipping purposes or dispose of according to
local regulations.

 Save the shipping brackets. They can be used later for seismically securing the coating
system. See 3.11 Anchoring the Coating System.

CAUTION! Lift the conformal coating system from the front only. Attempting to lift the
coating system from the back or sides may cause serious damage. Place forks
between the front feet, making sure that the blades reach from front to back.

WARNING! The coating system has a high center of gravity causing sensitivity to tipping.
Use extreme caution when lifting and moving the coating system.

7. Move the coating system over the location where it will be installed.
8. Slowly lower the forklift until the coating system conveyor rail is at the approximate height
of the mating upstream and downstream equipment.
9. Raise or lower each leveler (foot) as follows until they all touch the floor:
a. Loosen the 1 1/2-inch lock nut on the leveler (Figure 3-2).
b. Adjust the 1 1/2-inch post nut to raise or lower each leveler as required.
 Turning the post nut clockwise lowers the leveler. Turning the post nut
counterclockwise raises the leveler.
c. Tighten the lock nut.

3
1

Item Description Item Description


1 1 1/2-inch Wrench 4 Post
2 Leveler (foot) 5 Lock Nut
3 Post Nut
Figure 3-2 Adjusting the Levelers

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

10. Remove bag and plastic wrap from the machine.

 NOTE Location of packaging materials to be removed is indicated by the presence of


red warning tags.
11. Remove all shrink-wrap and other packing material from the perimeter of the coating
system.
12. Remove all perimeter packaging material from the dispensing area.

 NOTE Remove all shrink wrap and packing foam from the system prior to moving it to
a clean room. If necessary, clean the system thoroughly.

3.6 Unpacking the Coating Area


To unpack the coating area:
1. Remove all tie wraps, tape, foam packing material, and warning tags from the following
areas:

• Dispensing Head (Robot)

• Conveyor

 NOTE Location of packaging materials to be removed is indicated by the presence of


red warning tags. The amount, type, and arrangement of packaging materials
will depend on your system’s configuration.
2. Loosen the 3 mm setscrews on the X- and Y-axis dispensing head stoppers (Figure 3-3).
3. Remove the stoppers and retain them in a safe place.

1 2 3 4

Item Description Item Description


1 Y-Axis Stopper 3 X-Axis Stopper
2 Y-Rail (right side) 4 X-Beam
Figure 3-3 Dispensing Head Stopper Locations

3-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

4. Remove the shipping bracket and warning tag attached to the Z-head by loosening the three
(3) screws (Figure 3-4).

 Retain bracket and hardware for future shipping purposes.

Item Description
1 Allen Head Screws (3)

Figure 3-4 Removing the Z-Head Bracket

3.7 Leveling the Coating System

WARNING! The procedures in this section should only be performed by a trained service
technician. The system should be shut down for service before performing this
procedure. See 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.

To level the coating system:


1. Place a box level on the conveyor rail along the X-axis (Figure 3-5).
2. Observe the position of the bubble within the level’s window.

 The bubble should be centered, indicating the coating system is level from side-to-side.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

Figure 3-5 Leveling the Coating System - X-Axis

3. If necessary, adjust the levelers (Figure 3-6) of the coating system as follows:
a. Loosen the 1 1/2-inch lock nut on the leveler if necessary.
b. Turn the 1 1/2-inch post nut in the desired direction until the level’s bubble is centered,
indicating that the system is level from side-to-side.
 Turning the post nut clockwise raises the coating system. Turning the post nut
counterclockwise lowers the coating system.

Item Description
1 Lock Nut
2 Post Nut
3 Leveler
Figure 3-6 Coating System Levelers (Feet)

4. Place the box level between the front and rear conveyor rails along the Y-axis (Figure 3-7).
5. Observe the position of the bubble within the level’s window.

 The bubble should be centered, indicating coating system is level from front-to-back.

3-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

Figure 3-7 Leveling the Coating System - Y-Axis

6. If necessary, adjust the levelers (Figure 3-6) of the coating system as follows:
a. If necessary, loosen the 1 1/2-inch lock nut on the leveler.
b. Turn the 1 1/2-inch post nut in the desired direction until the level’s bubble is centered,
indicating that the system is level from front-to-back.
 Turning the post nut clockwise raises the coating system. Turning the post nut
counterclockwise lowers the coating system.
c. Tighten the 1 1/2-inch lock nut on the leveler.
7. Check the system for stability by pressing up and down on one of the top corners of the
coating system. If one leveler is lower or higher than the others, the coating system will
rock back and forth. Adjust the levelers so that they are all bearing the weight equally.
8. Re-level the coating system from side-to-side and from front-to-back, if necessary.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

3.8 Installing the Light Beacon


To install the light beacon:
1. Loosen the five (5) screws on the electronics/pneumatics cover and remove it.
2. Remove the ferrite bead from the cable.
3. Feed the electrical cable on the light beacon through the top of the light beacon base
(Figure 3-8A).
4. Set the light beacon into the base and tighten the four (4) set screws.
5. Route the electrical cable as shown in Figure 3-8A and Figure 3-8B.
6. Make the beacon electrical connections (Figure 3-8B).
7. Replace the ferrite bead.
8. Replace the electronics/pneumatics cover and tighten the screws that hold the panels
in place.

3
Figure 3-8A Figure 3-8B

Item Description
1 Beacon (P/N 7263560)
2 Electrical Cable
3 Ferrite Bead
Figure 3-8 Installing the Light Beacon

3-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

3.9 Installing the Laptop Computer


 NOTE The laptop computer is shipped from the factory fully charged.

To install the laptop computer:


1. Remove the laptop computer from its packaging.
2. Remove the keys from the lock and give them to the person responsible for the machine.

 The keys are used to lock the laptop computer to the conformal coating system tray.
3. Move the laptop tray arm bracket on the conformal coating system so that the laptop tray is
facing forward.
4. Attach the USB and network cables and grounding wire attachment to their respective ports
on the computer.
5. Attach the power cable to the rear of the computer.

 NOTE The laptop is adhered to the tray with a hook and loop fastener. Align the laptop
computer before placing it on the tray.
6. With the laptop lid closed, align the computer with the covers so that no gaps exist on the
left-hand side or the back edge.
7. Gently press the laptop onto the base.
8. Attach the locking cable to the laptop.

Figure 3-9 Aligning the Computer to the Tray Figure 3-10 Laptop Computer Installed

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

3.10 Installing the Optional Genie Camera


 NOTE The Genie Framework Software is installed at the factory prior to shipping.
To connect the camera:
1. Connect a power supply to the Genie camera (Figure 3-11).
2. Connect an RJ5 ethernet cable from the camera to the laptop computer.

1 2

Item Description
1 Power Connection
2 Ethernet Connection
Figure 3-11 Camera (Rear View)

3.11 Anchoring the Coating System


To prevent movement that could cause injury to personnel and damage to the coating system and facility,
each coating system leveler (foot) should be anchored to the floor with two (2) bolts (Figure 3-12). For
additional information, see 9.6 Stability Analysis.

Item Description
1 Bolt (2)
2 Leveler (Foot)
Figure 3-12 Anchoring the Coating System

 NOTE You may also use the shipping brackets to anchor the coating system.

3-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

3.12 Connecting Power and Air Supply

WARNING! Make sure that your facility meets all requirements listed in 9.4 Specifications.
Failure to meet these requirements could result in serious bodily injury to
personnel and damage to the coating system.

WARNING! The procedure in this section should only be performed by a trained service
technician.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Main Power Cable


• Facility Air Hose
To connect the system to facility power:
1. Locate the main power cable, included in the accessories crate.
2. Plug the female end of the power cable into the main power inlet on the lower left side of
the coating system.

WARNING! Make sure that the main circuit breaker is in the OFF (0) position before
connecting the coating system to the facility power source.

3. After making sure the main circuit breaker is off, plug the male end of the power cable into
the facility power source (Figure 3-13).
To connect the system to the facility air supply:

WARNING! Make sure that facility air pressure meets the requirements specified in
9.4 Specifications. Higher pressures will damage the coating system.

1. Locate and attach the quick disconnect air nozzle to the facility air hose.
2. Make sure the coating system main air regulator is closed.

 Verify facility air pressure is at 0 psi.


3. Connect the facility air hose to the main air inlet connector on the back-right side of the
coating system.
4. Connect the facility exhaust ventilation system ductwork to the exhaust vent duct
(Figure 3-13).
5. Adjust airflow to a minimum of 200 SCFM with the front door closed.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

Item Description
1 Exhaust Vent
2 Main Air Inlet
3 Main Power Circuit Breaker
4 Main Power Cord
Figure 3-13 Connecting the Facilities Power and Air Supply

3-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Installation

3.13 EasyCoat Installation


The EasyCoat Software is installed and configured at the factory prior to shipping. If you need to reinstall
the software, refer to the EasyCoat User Guide.
If you add or remove hardware you will need to reconfigure the software. Refer to the EasyCoat User
Guide.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3-13


4 Operation
4.1 Overview
This section describes the general sequence of actions necessary to power on and shutdown the coating
system; and to write and run a coating program. References to EasyCoat are included as a guide. For
detailed information, refer to the EasyCoat User Guide. This section covers the following topics:

• Powering on the Coating System • Daily Routine Procedures

• Camera States • Installing the Coating Applicator

• Starting EasyCoat for Windows • Filling the Fluid Reservoir

• Operator Screen • Changing Material/Flushing Fluid System

• Jog Window • Running a Characterization

• Edit Screen • Loading a Program

• Pneumatic Regulators and Gauges • Running a Program

• Monitoring the Air Pressure • Shutdown

 NOTE In this section, typical SL-940 configurations are considered. However, operational
details may vary with the configuration of your system.

WARNING! DO NOT operate the SL-940 Conformal Coating System unless you have
been trained to do so. Operating the conformal coating system without
proper training may result in personal injury or conformal coating system
damage.

4.2 Safety First


Operation of the SL-940 involves heat, air pressure, electrical power, mechanical devices, and the use of
hazardous materials. It is essential that every person servicing or operating the coating system fully
understands all hazards, risks, and safety precautions. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for additional
information.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.3 Powering on the Coating System


To power on the coating system:
1. Verify that the main power cord is connected to the main power inlet and the facility
power source.
2. Verify that the facility air hose at the recommended pressure level and connected to the
main air pressure regulator inlet. See 3.12 Connecting Power and Air Supply.
3. Verify that the facility exhaust ventilation system ductwork is connected to the exhaust vent
duct.
4. Turn the main circuit breaker on the back of the system to the ON (I) position.
5. Check the EMO buttons to see if they have been activated. If one has been activated,
deactivate it by turning the red knob clockwise until the knob pops out (Figure 4-1).
6. Make sure the interlock signal is not interrupted. Close the coating system hood if
applicable.
7. Verify the spill pan in the lower front cabinet is all the way in (Figure 1-7).
8. Turn the laptop computer power button ON (I).
9. Press the ON (l) button on the front panel (Figure 4-1).

 NOTE During power up, the green start button on the front panel will blink. The
coating system will turn on after an approximate 90-second vent air time delay
to ventilate any solvents in the dispense area. When the system is ready, the
green start button will display a solid light and the light beacon will be green.

 The coating system should be in a powered-up state.

 The system computer should begin the boot up sequence.

1
2

Item Description
1 Start Button
2 Stop Button
3 EMO
Figure 4-1 Front Panel Buttons

4-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.4 Camera States


An optional Teledyne Dalsa Genie M640 digital 640 x 480 pixel camera communicates bi-directionally to
the laptop computer via Gigabit ethernet. After the Genie software package installation, the GigE server
icon is visible in the desktop taskbar tray area. The icons and descriptions are shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Genie Camera States


Icon State Description
The GigE server tray icon when the Genie device is found. It will
Device Available take a few seconds for the GigE server to refresh its state after the
Genie has obtained an IP address.
The GigE server tray icon shows a warning when a device is
Device IP Error
connected but there is some type of IP error.

Device Not A red X will remain over the GigE server tray icon when the Genie
Available device is not found. This indicates a major network issue.

The Genie has one multicolor LED to provide a simple visible indication of camera state. Additionally,
the RJ45 has two LEDs for network status conditions (Figure 4-2). LED Status indicators are described in
Table 4-2.

1 2

Table 4-2 Camera Status Indicators


LED Status Description
LED's are OFF No power to camera
Steady Red Camera not initialized
Slow Flashing Red Camera initialization problem
Fast Flashing Red Camera overheating
Steady Blue IP address assigned
Item Description Slow Flashing Blue Waiting for an IP address
1 Camera Status LED Fast Flashing Blue Ethernet cable disconnected
2 Network Status LED Steady Green Application linked to the camera

Figure 4-2 Camera LED's (Rear View) Slow Flashing Green Trigger acquisition in progress

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.5 Starting EasyCoat for Windows


The EasyCoat startup procedure assumes that the computer is ON and running Windows.
To start EasyCoat:

1. Double-click the EasyCoat icon on the Windows desktop.


2. If prompted, enter your name and password.

 The coating system will find home in the Z-axis, Y-axis, and X-axis, respectively.

 The EasyCoat Operator Screen opens (Figure 4-3).

 Refer to 4.16 Loading a Program and 4.17 Running a Program for instructions on
loading and running a program.

 NOTE The Operator Screen will vary slightly depending on system configuration.

4.6 Operator Screen


The Operator Screen (Figure 4-3) contains all tools necessary to run production. You can load a program,
run a program, pause a program, and stop a program through the Operator Screen. In addition you can
monitor events, system variables, and system status. The left panel on the Operator Screen can be resized
by clicking and dragging the double lines to the desired width.
A brief description of the items on the operator screen is contained in Table 4-3. Detailed descriptions are
addressed in other sections of the manual.

1 2 3 4

11

10

5
9
6

8 7

Figure 4-3 EasyCoat Operator Screen (Inline System shown)

4-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

Table 4-3 Operator Screen Menu Description


Item Name Description
The menu contains a list of program commands sorted by categories.
1 Menu Bar
See 4.6.1 Operator Screen Menu Bar for details.
The Machine Status Bar displays the machine status. There are three
color indications:
2 Machine Status Bar Green - Good
Yellow - In production, but needs attention
Red - Error/Fault
Status bar color indications match the beacon color indications.
3 Silence Alarm Button Click to silence an alarm activated by a fault.
Click to clear fault(s). Only clearable faults, such as a board failing to
load, can be cleared. Faults generated by hardware failures, such as
4 Clear Faults Button
Controller Offline, cannot be cleared with this button. If the problem
that generated the fault(s) is not corrected, faults will re-occur.
Provides quick access to commonly used features. See 4.6.4 Control
5 Control Panel
Panel for details.
Custom Buttons can be defined by the user. The default buttons are
6 Custom Buttons
shown in Figure 4-9. See 4.6.5 Custom Buttons.
Displays the name of the current product program, the current tool,
7 Status Bar
and conveyor.
8 Event Monitor Reports system events as they occur. See 4.6.3 Event Monitor.
These buttons toggle between the jog window and event log or a
combination of both. The display changes depending on the item
selected.
Jog Select this button to display the Jog Window.
Jog/Event Monitor
9 Event Select to display the Event Monitor. See 4.6.2
Buttons
Monitor Variable Monitor.
Select to display both the Jog Window and the
Event Log. This button is only available if the
Both
screen layout size will accommodate both the jog
window and the event log.
These buttons turn the Jog Window and/or Event Log panel display
on and off.
When the left panel is collapsed, the operator
Collapse/Expand
10 Collapse screen displays minimum, but critical
Buttons
information.
When the left panel is expanded, the user has
Expand
access to the Jog Window and/or Event Log.
Right click to display a list of system variables. Left click on a variable
11 Variable Monitors
to display it in graph or text format. See 4.6.2 Variable Monitor.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.6.1 Operator Screen Menu Bar


Each item on the Operator Screen menu bar activates a drop-down menu (Figure 4-4). Some drop-down
menu selections open dialog boxes. Drop down menus, along with a brief explanation of each menu, are
shown in Figure 4-4. If a menu item is light gray, it is not available at the present time.

 NOTE Menu choices will vary depending on system configuration.

File Edit Configure Tool View Help

Film Coater
Exit Edit Mode …
SC300 Applicator Bead
SC300 Applicator Monofilament
SC300 Applicator Swirl
SC300 Applicator High Air
SC300 Applicator Low Air
Genie Camera
Tool Flange
Edit Mode …
Language …
Data
Live Video F4

Help …
Shortcut Key Legend…
Show Hints
Enter Issue Report…
About …

Menu Command Description


File Exit Exits the EasyCoat program.
Edit Edit Mode Opens the EasyCoat Edit Screen.
Displays the name of the currently configured tools and is used to
Configure
(Toolname) perform a characterization. For detailed information, refer to
Tool
Section 5 - Configuration and Setup.
If the Edit Screen is open but hidden by the operator screen, select
Edit Mode View > Edit Mode to view the Edit Screen. If the Edit Screen is not
open, this choice will be grayed-out.
Language Allows you to select the desired language.
View
Allows you to view production or fan width data (if fan width control is
Data
installed).
Opens the “live” camera. If you are working offline, it opens the
Live Video
offline camera.
Help Opens the EasyCoat Help Menu.
Shortcut Key
Displays a list of keyboard shortcuts.
Legend
Help
Show Hints Toggles the screen hint feature on and off.
Enter Issue Report NOT USED.
About Displays the EasyCoat version number.
Figure 4-4 Operator Screen Menu Bar

4-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.6.2 Variable Monitor


EasyCoat allows you to monitor variables such as, cycle time, product count, and production state. To
display variables, right click the variable monitor. A menu appears listing available options (Figure 4-5).
Left click an item to select it. A checkmark appears next to the selected item. To deselect an item, click
on it again. Variables may be displayed in graph or text format. Select the appropriate tab to view the
desired format.

 NOTE Variable items vary depending on system configuration.

Figure 4-5 Variable Monitor

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.6.3 Event Monitor


4.6.3.1 Events Tab
The Events tab reports system events as they occur. The text is color-coded.
• Green - Normal system events
• Yellow - Warnings
• Red - Errors

Figure 4-6 Event Monitor

4.6.3.2 Controls Tab

Select the Controls tab to adjust the fluid pressure, actuation pressure, or air assist pressure. The choices
on this tab depend in the tool selected.

Figure 4-7 Controls Tab

4-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.6.4 Control Panel


The control panel provides quick access to common commands. As you hover over the button with the
mouse, a tip will appear displaying the name of the button.

Button Command Description


Run Production
(Inline Configuration) Starts a production run. When production is running, the Run
Run Production Production button changes to the pause button.
(Batch Configuration)
Pauses the current program. If a program is not running, the start
Pause Button
production button will be displayed instead.
Load Product
Loads a product into the fixture.
(Inline Configuration)
Unload Product Unloads a product from the fixture. Does not move the product to
(Inline Configuration) the downstream machine.
Stops production. Production will stop when the current product
Stop program is complete. Press the Emergency Machine Off (EMO)
button on your coating system to stop production immediately.
Opens the product map where you can load a new product
Change Product
program.

Exit Exits the EasyCoat software.

Figure 4-8 Control Panel

4.6.5 Custom Buttons


The custom button toolbar is located directly below the control panel. Custom buttons can be defined by
the user. The default buttons are shown in Figure 4-9. Refer to the EasyCoat User Guide on creating
Custom Buttons.

Button Command Description


Executes the Begin Idle procedure in the currently loaded product or
Begin Idle macro program. Typically, the Begin Idle procedure places the nozzle in
a solvent bath.
Executes the End Idle procedure in the currently loaded product or
End Idle macro program. Typically, the End Idle procedure purges the solvent
from the nozzle before resuming production.
Executes the periodic procedure in the currently loaded product or
Run Periodic
macro program.

Go To Front Moves the tool arm to the front-center of the workcell.

Home Z axis Moves the tool arm to the top of the Z-axis.

Figure 4-9 Default Custom Button Toolbar

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.7 Jog Window


The Jog window lets you move the robot or conveyor. The Jog window can be accessed from both the
Operator and Edit Screens.

To open the Jog window, click on the Jog button located on the left panel of the Operator or Edit
Screen.
The Jog Menu has two buttons at the top of the screen. Select Robot Jog to jog the robot and Conveyor
Jog to jog the conveyor.

4.7.1 Robot Jog Controls


To jog the robot:

1. Click on the Robot Jog button in the Jog window to access the robot.

 The Jog Panel appears (Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11).

Figure 4-10 Robot XY Jog Controls Figure 4-11 Robot Z Jog Controls

2. Click on the down arrow in the text box to select the tool to jog (Figure 4-12).

Figure 4-12 Select Tool

4-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

3. Select the XY button to display the XY Jog arrows. Select the Z button to display the Z Jog
arrows. See Table 4-4 for a description of the robot jog controls.

Table 4-4 Robot Jog Controls


Robot Jog Controls
Moves the robot to the right at slow speed.
Moves the robot to the right at fast speed.
Moves the robot to the left at slow speed.
Moves the robot to the left at fast speed.
Moves the robot to the back at slow speed.
Moves the robot to the back at fast speed.
Moves the robot to the front at slow speed.
Moves the robot to the front at fast speed.
Moves the robot up at slow speed.
Moves the robot up at fast speed.
Moves the robot down at slow speed.
Moves the robot down at fast speed.

4.7.1.1 Tool Button

If the tool is configured with rotate and/or tilt, a Tool button will be visible in the jog
window. Click the Rotate/Tilt button to access the rotate/tilt jog controls (Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14).

Four Position Rotate and Tilt


If a tool with a circular fluid pattern is configured with rotate and tilt, four arrows appear representing the
direction of the tool tip. Clicking the center button moves the tool back to upright position (0 degree
tilt) and rotates it to the home position (0 degrees) (Figure 4-13).

Figure 4-13 Four Position Tilt

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

0-90 Degree Rotate


If the tool is configured with 0-90 degree rotation (fourth axis), the rotate/tilt menu is limited to the
vertical and horizontal directions (Figure 4-14). The actual rotate degree is dependent on the fluid shape
information.
If the fan pattern is wider than the length, selecting the vertical button issues a zero (0) degree rotation. If
the length is greater than the width, selecting the vertical button issues a 90 degree rotation. The user only
selects the pattern direction. The system determines the rotation degree.

Figure 4-14 0-90 Degree Rotate

4-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.7.2 Conveyor Jog Controls


To jog the conveyor:

1. Select the Conveyor Jog Button to access the Conveyor Jog panel.

 Controls include slow a fast jog speeds.

2. Click on the right arrow or move the conveyor belt/chain to the right.

3. Click on the left arrow or move the conveyor belt/chain to the left.

Figure 4-15 Conveyor Jog Buttons - Single Lane Figure 4-16 Conveyor Jog Buttons - Dual Lane

Table 4-5 Conveyor Jog Controls


Conveyor Jog Controls
Moves the conveyor belt/chain to the right at slow speed.
Moves the conveyor belt/chain to the right at fast speed.
Moves the conveyor belt/chain to the left at slow speed.
Moves the conveyor belt/chain to the left at fast speed.
Adjusts the conveyor width.
Adjusts the conveyor width.
Loads a product into the fixture.

Unloads a product from the fixture. Does not move the product to
the downstream machine.
Select to move the rear conveyor rail (Dual Lane systems only).

Select to move the front conveyor rail (Dual Lane systems only).

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.7.3 Shortcut Keys


If necessary, the operator can use EasyCoat shortcut keys to reposition the robot, move the conveyor, and
toggle the camera window ON/OFF.

Key Combination Function


[Ctrl] + up arrow Move robot in positive y, slowly
[Ctrl] + down arrow Move robot in negative y, slowly
[Ctrl] + right arrow Move robot in positive x, slowly
[Ctrl] + left arrow Move robot in negative x, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + up arrow Move robot in positive y, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + down arrow Move robot in negative y, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + right arrow Move robot in positive x, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + left arrow Move robot in negative x, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Z] + right arrow Move robot in positive z, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Z] + left arrow Move robot in negative z, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Z] + right arrow Move robot in positive z, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Z] + left arrow Move robot in negative z, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Alt] + up arrow Move conveyor rails in positive y, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Alt] + down arrow Move conveyor rails in negative y, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Alt] + right arrow Move conveyor chain in positive x, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Alt] + left arrow Move conveyor chain in negative x, slowly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Alt] + up arrow Move conveyor rail in positive y, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Alt] + down arrow Move conveyor rail in negative y, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Alt] + right arrow Move conveyor chain in positive x, quickly
[Ctrl] + [Shift] + [Alt] + left arrow Move conveyor chain in negative x, quickly
[F4] Toggle Camera Window On/Off
[F6] Run the active pattern or procedure
[F9] Run the Main Pattern in the current program

4-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.8 Edit Screen


The Edit Screen (Figure 4-18) is used for creating and editing programs, configuring system hardware,
and testing and adjusting system settings. Menu choices may vary depending on system configuration. If
desired, the Edit Screen can be password protected. Only those authorized to create and edit programs,
configuration system hardware, and adjust system settings should have access to the Edit Screen.

 NOTE Refer to the EasyCoat User Guide for detailed information on the Edit Screen.
To open the edit screen:
1. If production is running, click on the Stop button to stop production. Wait for the current
program to complete.
2. Click on Edit > Edit Mode from the EasyCoat Operator Screen to open the Edit Screen
(Figure 4-17).
3. If prompted, enter your password. The password is optional.

 The Edit Screen opens (Figure 4-18).

Figure 4-17 Opening the Edit Screen

Figure 4-18 EasyCoat Edit Screen

 NOTE If the Edit Screen is open but hidden by the Operator Screen, click on
View > Edit Mode to bring the Edit Screen to the front.

4. Click on Close to close the Edit Screen and return to the Operator Screen.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-15


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.9 Pneumatic Regulators and Gauges


The SL-940 Conformal Coating System has the following pneumatic regulators and gauges:

• Main Air Regulator and Gauge

• Reservoir Pressure Regulator and Gauge

• Fluid Pressure and Air Assist Regulators and Gauges

• Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge


The main air regulator is located at the rear of the system (Figure 4-19). The reservoir pressure regulator
is located inside the front cabinet (Figure 4-20). If the system is equipped with electronic pressure control
(E/P) regulators, fluid and air assist pressures are adjusted through the EasyCoat software (Figure 4-21).
If the system has manual fluid and air assist regulators, the regulators are in the front cabinet and the
associated gauges are on the front panel (Figure 4-22).
Recommended pressure settings are provided in Table 4-6. See detailed adjustment instructions following
descriptions in this section.

Table 4-6 Recommended Pressure Settings


Device Recommended Pressure Comments
Facility pressure is 586 to 620 kPa
Main Air Pressure Regulator 551 kPa (80 psi)
(85 to 90 psi).
Recommended pressure depends on
fluid being dispensed and coating
10 to 20 psi higher than the
Reservoir Air Pressure applicator being used. Refer to the
highest fluid pressure used in
Regulator Installation and Operations manual
the program.
applicable to the coating applicator on
your system.
Recommended pressure depends on
fluid being dispensed and coating
applicator being used. Refer to the
Fluid Pressure 1 to 60 psi (typical)
Installation and Operations manual
applicable to the coating applicator on
your system.
The Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge
Conveyor Air Regulator and
276 kPa (40 psi) is used to adjust pressure for the
Gauge
conveyor stop pins and board pins.

 NOTE Some coating applicators need a minimum of 345 to 414 kPa (50-60 psi) for optimum
performance.

4-16 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.9.1 Main Air Regulator and Gauge


The main air inlet provides regulated air pressure to the coating system from your facility air source. You
can adjust the main air pressure with the main air regulator. The recommended pressure from the facility
air supply to the coating system is 586 to 620 kPa (85 to 90 psi).
To adjust the main air pressure:
1. Verify that the facility air is connected to the main air pressure regulator inlet.
2. Locate the main air regulator at the rear of the coating system (Figure 4-19).
3. Rotate the main air regulator counterclockwise until the main air gauge registers zero (0).
4. Rotate the main air regulator clockwise until the main air gauge registers 586 to 620 kPa
(85 to 90 psi).

 For accurate pressure adjustment, lower the pressure below the desired level and then
increase to the desired pressure.
5. If the main air gauge fails to register pressure, verify that the coating system is connected to
the facility air source.

 If there is an air leak, identify the source, shut off the facility air, and fix the leak before
proceeding.

 NOTE The regulator assembly is equipped with a relief valve to protect the system components.
Increasing the pressure above 655 kPa (95 psi) may trigger the relief valve. If so, reduce
the air pressure below 655 kPa.

Item Description
1 Main Air Regulator (P/N 7209437)
2 Main Air Inlet
3 Main Air Gauge

Figure 4-19 Adjusting Main Air Pressure

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-17


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.9.2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator and Gauge


The reservoir pressure regulator controls the pressure of the fluid reservoir for the SC-205 Non-
Circulating Film Coater, the SC-280N Non-Circulating Film Coater, the SC-80C Circulating Film Coater,
the SC-300/SC-350 Swirl Coat Applicator, and the SC-400 Conformal Coating Jet. For more details on
how the air is used for coating applicator operation and recommended pressure setting, refer to the
manual for your specific coating applicator.
To adjust the reservoir pressure:
1. Verify that the facility air is connected to the main air pressure regulator inlet.
2. Locate the reservoir pressure regulator adjustment knob inside the front cabinet.
3. Unlock the knob by pulling it outward.
4. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator adjustment knob counterclockwise until the reservoir
pressure gauge registers zero (0).
5. Rotate the knob clockwise until the reservoir pressure gauge registers 413 kPa (60 psi).

 For accurate pressure adjustment, lower the pressure below the desired level and then
increase to the desired pressure.

 If there is an air leak, identify the source, shut off the facility air, and fix the leak
before proceeding.
1
6. Lock the knob by pushing it inward.

Item Description
1 Reservoir Pressure Gauge
2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator

Figure 4-20 Adjusting the Reservoir Pressure

4-18 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.9.3 Fluid Pressure and Air Assist Regulators and Gauges


4.9.3.1 Electronic Pressure (E/P) Regulators

E/P regulators are EasyCoat software-controlled electronic regulators. Fluid pressure can be adjusted
from both the EasyCoat Operator and Edit screens.
To adjust the fluid pressure (Operator Screen):
1. Click on the Controls tab at the bottom of the Operator Screen (Figure 4-21).
2. Select the desired applicator by clicking on the associated tab.
3. To use the slider bar:
a. Center the mouse pointer on the slider bar.
b. Click and hold the left mouse button while moving the slider bar. Moving it to the right
will increase the pressure and to the left will decrease the pressure.
 The fluid pressure is displayed above the slider bar.
4. You can also type in the desired fluid pressure, by typing over the current fluid pressure
value displayed above the slider bar.
1

Item Description
1 Controls Tab
2 Current Fluid Pressure Value
3 Fluid Pressure Slider Bar
4 Current Air Assist Pressure Value (optional - depends on valve selected)
5 Air Assist Slider Bar (optional - depends on valve selected)
Figure 4-21 Adjusting the Fluid Pressure (E/P Regulators)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-19


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.9.3.2 Manual Regulators and Gauges

If the coating system is equipped with manual regulator and gauges, the fluid and air assist gauges are
located on the front panel and the adjustment knobs are in the front cabinet of the coating system.
To adjust the fluid pressure:
1. Locate the regulator adjustment knobs in the front cabinet (Figure 4-22).
2. Rotate the adjustment knob counterclockwise until the gauge registers 0 psi.

 For accurate pressure adjustment, lower the pressure below the desired level and then
increase to the desired pressure.
3. Rotate the adjustment knob clockwise until the associated gauge registers the air pressure
value (psi or kPa) required by your coating application.

1 2

Item Description
1 Fluid Air Gauge
2 Air Assist Gauge
3 Fluid Air Regulator
4 Air Assist Regulator
Figure 4-22 Manual Pressure Regulator and Gauge Locations
(Single Applicator System shown)

4-20 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.9.4 Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge

 NOTE The conveyor air regulator and gauge is preset at the factory.
To adjust the conveyor air pressure:
1. Locate the conveyor air regulator adjustment knob inside the rear cover of the coating
system (Figure 4-23).
2. With the main air pressure ON, check the gauge reading.

 The gauges should read 276 kPa ± 28 kPa (40 psi ± 5 psi).
3. If the conveyor air regulator needs adjustment, loosen the jam nut to unlock the regulator.
4. Rotate the regulator counterclockwise until the conveyor air gauge registers zero (0).
5. Rotate it clockwise until the conveyor air gauge registers 276 kPa (40 psi).
6. When the desired air pressure is set, tighten the jam nut on the conveyor air regulator.
2

1
Item Description
1 Conveyor Air Gauge
2 Conveyor Air Regulator

Figure 4-23 Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-21


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.10 Monitoring the Air Pressure


The EasyCoat Operator Screen displays air pressure monitors that the operator can view during
production runs. Pressure can be displayed in graph or text format by clicking on the desired tab
(Figure 4-24). See 4.6.2 Variable Monitor for instructions.

Item Description
1 Pressure Monitors
2 Adjustment Sliders
Figure 4-24 Monitoring the Fluid Pressure in EasyCoat

4-22 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.11 Daily Routine Procedures


Table 4-7 contains a brief description and instructions for routine procedures that should be performed
daily before and after operating the coating system.

Table 4-7 Daily Routine Procedures


Procedure Description
STARTUP
Ensure that the main air pressure is properly adjusted. If necessary,
adjust the main air pressure as described in 4.9.1 Main Air Regulator
Check Main Air Pressure
and Gauge. Record the proper setting on the daily routine checklist for
daily reference.
Ensure that the reservoir pressure is properly adjusted. If necessary,
adjust the fluid pressure as described in 4.9.2 Reservoir Pressure
Regulator and Gauge. Record the proper setting on the daily routine
Check Reservoir Pressure checklist for daily reference.
 NOTE Refer to the manual for your specific coating applicator
for appropriate fluid pressure settings.
Verify that the exhaust vent is properly connected to the facility exhaust
Verify Exhaust Connection
system ductwork. Refer to 3.12 Connecting Power and Air Supply.
Check Ventilation Airflow Verify ventilation holes are clear from obstructions.
Fill Fluid Reservoir Fill the Fluid Reservoir as described in 4.13 Filling the Fluid Reservoir.
Inspect coating system for broken, loose, worn, or missing hardware.
Inspect Hardware
Replace or repair as necessary.
Make sure that the solvent cup is filled with a clean supply of the
Fill Solvent Cup appropriate solvent and is properly placed for the selected coating
program.
Inspect Electrical and Inspect coating system for broken, loose, or frayed electrical and
Pneumatic Lines pneumatic lines. Replace as necessary.
Inspect conveyor rollers, bearings, and chain for surface damage.
Inspect Conveyor Ensure that no foreign material adheres to surfaces. Clean and replace
as necessary.
Verify Material Temperature Verify the Material Temperature, if applicable.
Perform a characterization if necessary. Refer to 4.15 Running a
Perform Characterization
Characterization.
SHUTDOWN
Remove all workpieces and foreign objects from the dispensing and
Remove Workpieces
conveyor areas.
Flush the Fluid System. See 4.14 Changing Material/Flushing Fluid
Flush Fluid System
System.
Clean all surfaces of the coating system (doors, side panels, front
Clean Coating System
panel, part sensor, etc.).
Clean Nozzle Refer to the manual for your specific coating applicator for instructions.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-23


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.12 Installing the Coating Applicator


Install the coating applicator as described in the applicable coating applicator manual. SL-940 valve and
pneumatic connections are shown in Figure 4-25.

 NOTE Pneumatic connections may vary depending on the coating applicator. Refer to the
applicable coating manual for instructions.

1
2

3 4

Item Description
1 Valve 1 Pneumatic Connections
2 Valve 2 Pneumatic Connections
3 Valve 1 Electrical Connection
4 Valve 2 Electrical Connection
5 Valve and Pneumatic Connections (SC-280 shown)
Figure 4-25 Valve Electrical and Pneumatic Connections

4-24 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.13 Filling the Fluid Reservoir

CAUTION! Make sure to observe the fluid level indicator. Never let the coating system run
out of fluid as this may damage the coating applicator.

To fill the fluid reservoir:


1. Turn the applicable reservoir air pressure switch to the OFF (0) position (Figure 4-26).
2. Relieve residual pressure in the fluid system by opening the pressure relief valve on the
fluid reservoir.
3. Open the lid and check that the reservoir is clean and free from foreign materials.

WARNING! Solvent vapors may be released when the lid is open. Always wear appropriate
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) as recommended by facility safety
practices and the material manufacturer’s SDS.

4. Add fluid up to a maximum of 50 mm (2 inch) below the rim of the opening.


5. Close the lid immediately after filling.

Item Description
1 Reservoir Air Pressure Switches (A & B)
2 Pressure Relief Valve
3 Fluid Reservoir
Figure 4-26 Filling the Fluid Reservoir

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-25


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.14 Changing Material/Flushing Fluid System

WARNING! Follow SDS recommendations for the proper handling and disposal of all
materials when changing material/flushing fluid system. Always wear
appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) as recommended by facility
safety practices and the material manufacturer’s SDS.

To change material and flush the fluid system:


1. If applicable, turn off the heater and allow the fluid to cool for at least fifteen minutes.

 To speed up the cooling process, you may circulate the material. The temperature can
be monitored in the Temperature Sense window in EasyCoat (Figure 4-27).

 NOTE To view the Temperature Sense window, the option must be activated in
EasyCoat. See the EasyCoat User Guide for instructions.

Figure 4-27 EasyCoat Temperature Sense Window


2. Reduce the fluid air pressure to 48 kPa (7 psi).
 Refer to 4.9.3 Fluid Pressure and Air Assist Regulators and Gauges for instructions on
adjusting fluid pressure.
3. Open the purge and filter drain valves.
4. If the fluid system is heated, perform the steps below. If not skip to Step 5.
a. Adjust the main air pressure to allow the diaphragm pump (Figure 4-28) to stroke
slowly.
 The material will drain into the reservoir.
b. When the system is empty, stop the pump by reducing the main air pressure to zero.
5. Flush the system with solvent as described below:
a. Connect the siphoning hose to a container filled with 0.75 liter (1 quart) of solvent.
b. Put the drain hose into the waste container.
c. If the system is heated, start the pump by increasing the main air pressure.
 The solvent will purge residual material out of the system.
d. Close the purge valve.

4-26 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

 NOTE If you are using a circulating coating applicator, such as the SC-104HS or SC-105HS,
perform Step 5e through Step 5g to circulate the material. Otherwise, skip to Step 7.
e. Close the filter drain valve.
f. Open the circulation valve by turning it counterclockwise so the circulation rate is
approximately 20 cycles/minute.
g. Purge the coating applicator several times.

 NOTE A purge program is necessary to properly purge the film coater before
and after use. A purge routine is included in the software. For assistance
in writing a routine, refer to the EasyCoat User Guide or contact your
Nordson ASYMTEK representative.
6. Clean the reservoir and fill it with new material.
7. Empty the fluid system and check the fluid filter.
8. Prime the fluid system with new material.

 NOTE Check that all residual solvent was purged into the waste container by the
new material.

4 5 6

Item Description Item Description


1 Pump 5 Filter Drain Valve
2 Purge Valve 6 Filter Assembly
3 Circulation Valve 7 Fluid Heater
4 Fluid Regulator (P/N 7211533)
Figure 4-28 Fluid System (VCS shown)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-27


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.15 Running a Characterization


 NOTE A characterization must be performed for each tool and each coating material used or as
required to ensure quality and consistent dispensing.
Many variables, such as material type, temperature, viscosity, substrate type, robot velocities, and
dispenser response times affect the coating process. Characterization improves coating placement
accuracy, and repeatability. The Characterization Wizard helps you adjust program values to compensate
for these variables. The characterization process consists of defining the following values:

• On/Off Response Times

• Coating Height

• Coating Speed (Velocity)

• Coating Width

 NOTE All of these variables are interrelated. Make your selections based on the results you want
to achieve. Refer to the EasyCoat User Guide or Online Help or contact your Nordson
ASYMTEK representative for additional information.
The characterization automatically calculates dispensing ON and OFF times. Characterization
compensates for such variables as:

• Change in air pressure

• Fluid viscosity

• Coating applicator velocity


When you perform a characterization, the coating applicator will dispense three stripes of material. You
will then be prompted to select the best pass for both the start and end values. The values will be stored in
the robot controller. The coating applicator will then dispense three additional stripes of material. These
lines should correspond to the best pass previously selected. This is your characterization.
A characterization should be performed:

• When a new applicator is installed

• When using a new material

• When changing the applicator or material type

• Prior to a production run

 NOTE A characterization may be performed from both the Operator and Edit Screens. The
following steps describe how to perform a characterization from the Operator Screen.
Refer to the EasyCoat User Guide for instructions on performing a characterization from
the Edit Screen.

4-28 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

To perform a characterization:
1. Select Configure Tool > Toolname from the EasyCoat Operator Screen menu bar.

Figure 4-29 Configure Tool - Operator Screen

 The Conformal Coating Characterization Wizard window opens (Figure 4-30).

Figure 4-30 EasyCoat Characterization Wizard Window

2. Click Clear Positions and then click OK to confirm.

 If you have performed a characterization before, the old test area coordinates are used
unless you clear them.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Yes when prompted to teach the substrate height.
5. Teach the substrate height.
a. Place a characterization sheet in the workcell (Figure 4-31).
b. Lower the pointer to the substrate and click Teach Z.
c. Click OK.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-29


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

6. Enter the dispense height.

 The following variables should be considered:


- Height of tallest component to be coated
- Width of coating pass
- Coating material flow rate and viscosity
- Coating pass overlap
7. If the fluid applicator is configured with the rotate and a cross-cut nozzle, enter the desired
rotate position and click Next.
8. Enter the desired dispense speed and click Next.

 You will be prompted to insert a characterization sheet into the workcell.

 NOTE Refer to the characterization sheet (Figure 4-31) for Step 9 through Step 11.
9. Position the camera crosshairs or tool tip over the left intersection of the dotted lines and
press Next.
10. Position the camera crosshairs or tool tip over the right intersection of the dotted lines and
press Next.
11. Position the camera crosshairs or tool tip over the right dotted line and the back line and
press Next.

4-30 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

 

Figure 4-31 Characterization Sheet

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-31


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

12. Click Next.

 The Wizard will now apply three coating passes to the characterization sheet
(Figure 4-32).

Step 16:
Verification Verify start and
Passes end points of
each coat lines
up on dotted
lines

Step 13a: Step 13c:


Draw a line Draw a line
that crosses that crosses
coat path coat path
start points end points
Step 13b: Step 13d:
Teach start Teach end
point here point here

Figure 4-32A First Pass Figure 4-32B Verification Pass


Figure 4-32 Material Characterization

13. You will be prompted to teach the start and end points of the first coat passes. Refer to
Figure 4-32A.
a. Draw a line that crosses the start of each coat pass.
b. Teach the point where that line intersects the dotted line.
 This point may or may not be on the coat pass.
c. Draw a line that crosses the end of each coat pass.
d. Teach the point where that line intersects the dotted line.
 This point may or may not be on the coat pass.
14. Measure the width of the coating pass and enter it when prompted to set the width of the
dispense pattern (Figure 4-33).

4-32 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

Figure 4-33 Set Width of Dispense Pattern

15. Click on Next.

 The wizard applies three verification coating passes to the characterization sheet.
16. Verify that the start and end points of each verification pass line up on the dotted lines on
the characterization sheet (Figure 4-32B).

 The coating parameters will be displayed for your approval (Figure 4-34 and
Figure 4-35).

 If alignment is not achieved, press the Back button to rerun from Step 13.

Figure 4-34 On/Off Response Times Figure 4-35 Coating Values

17. When you are satisfied with the alignment, click on Next.

 You will be prompted to save the new settings (Figure 4-36).


18. Click on Finish to save the settings.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-33


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

Figure 4-36 Save Characterization Settings

4-34 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.16 Loading a Program


To load a program from the operator screen:

1. Select Open from the Control Panel (Figure 4-38).

 The Product Map opens (Figure 4-37).

 The Product Map is a tree structure of the folders and subfolders where the programs
are stored.
- Click on a plus sign (+) to expand a group and view the product programs in
that group.
- Click on a minus sign (-) to collapse a group.

Figure 4-37 Product Map

2. Select the desired program from the list and click OK.

 The name of the open program is displayed at the bottom of the Operator Screen
(Figure 4-38).

Figure 4-38 Operator Screen - Conveyor System

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-35


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

To load a program from the Edit Screen:


1. Select File > Open Product Program from the Edit Screen menu bar (Figure 4-39).
2. Select a program from the list.
3. Click on Open.

 The name of the current program is displayed below the tool bar (Figure 4-40).

Figure 4-39 Edit Screen - Open Product Program

Figure 4-40 Edit Screen - Program Name

4-36 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.17 Running a Program


Programs can be run from both the EasyCoat Operator Screen and the EasyCoat Edit Screen. Following
are detailed instructions on running a program from both screens.

4.17.1 Inline System


To run a program from the operator screen (inline system):
1. Load the product at the mouth of conveyor (or loader, if applicable).
2. Click on Load Product from the Control Panel.
3. Click on Run to start the program.

Figure 4-41 Operator Screen - Inline System

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-37


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.17.2 Batch System


To run a program from the operator screen (batch system):
1. Perform Step 1 and Step 2 under 4.17.1 Inline System.
2. Load a product on the tooling plate.

3. Select Run Production from the Control Panel (Figure 4-42) to start the program.

Figure 4-42 Operator Screen - Batch System

 NOTE See 4.17.3 Edit Screen for instructions on running a program from the Edit Screen.

4-38 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.17.3 Edit Screen


To test a program, you can run the program from the edit mode. You have the option of running through
the entire program, stepping through the program, or running an individual pattern or procedure.
To run the entire program from the edit screen:
1. Load a new product (board or carrier) into the work area.
2. Select Run > Run from the Edit Screen menu bar (Figure 4-43).
 You may also start the program run by clicking the Run button on the toolbar or
pressing the [F9] key.

3. Click on Pause or Stop anytime during program execution to pause or stop the
program.

Figure 4-43 Running a Program - Edit Screen

To step through the program:


1. Load a new product (board or carrier) into the work area.

2. Select Run > Step from the Edit Screen menu bar or select the Step button on the
toolbar.
 Each click on the button performs one instruction.
To run an individual pattern or procedure:
1. Highlight the desired pattern.
2. Select Run > Run Pattern/Procedure from the menu bar or press the [F6] key.

3. Click on Pause or Stop anytime during pattern/procedure execution to pause or stop


the program.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-39


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.18 Shutdown
4.18.1 Emergency Shutdown
In case of an emergency or malfunction, press one of the EMO buttons. The EMO buttons are the
large red buttons located on the front panel and rear of the coating system. For more information, see
2.12 Emergency Shutdown.

WARNING! Power is still available to the power supply and to the power manager after an
emergency shutdown. To fully remove power to the system, all power cords must
be disconnected.

4.18.2 Routine Shutdown


Routine shutdown may vary depending on your requirements. The system may be left in the power-on
state at the end of the day or turned off completely. However, it is recommended that you incorporate the
following procedure into your production shutdown routine.
To shut down at the end of a production shift (overnight):
If you are using a coating material without pot life limitations, follow these steps for shutdown.
1. Wait for the dispensing program to complete.
2. Verify that all motion has stopped.
3. Unload all boards from the conveyor.
4. Exit EasyCoat.
5. Turn the reservoir air pressure switch (Figure 1-8) to the OFF (0) position.
6. Press the Stop (0) button on the front panel.
7. To prevent material from curing inside the coating applicator nozzle, immerse the applicator
in the appropriate solvent in the stainless-steel solvent cup.

 NOTE Observe material pot life recommendations when cleaning the nozzle.
8. If nozzle cleaning is required:
a. Remove the nozzle from the coating applicator.
b. Immerse the nozzle in solvent.
 If necessary, use a Nordson ASYMTEK nozzle brush (P/N 901905) to remove
build-up.
c. Dry the nozzle and inspect the orifice for blockage.
d. Immerse the nozzle in solvent and store it in a safe place.

4-40 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Operation

4.18.3 Extended Shutdown


If the system will be shut down for several days, or if your coating material has a short pot life, follow the
procedures outlined in the appropriate coating applicator manual for cleaning and maintenance of the
coating applicator and nozzle.

4.18.4 Service Shutdown


To shut down for service:
1. Wait for the dispensing program to complete.
2. Verify that all motion has stopped.
3. Unload all boards from the conveyor.
4. Exit EasyCoat.
5. Exit Windows.
6. Flush the fluid system with the appropriate solvent as described in 4.14 Changing
Material/Flushing Fluid System.
7. When the fluid system has been flushed, turn the reservoir air pressure switch (Figure 1-8)
to the OFF (0) position.
8. Press the Stop button on the front panel.
9. Remove the nozzle from the coating applicator.
10. To prevent material from curing inside the coating applicator nozzle, immerse the applicator
in the appropriate solvent in the stainless-steel solvent cup.

 If necessary, use a Nordson ASYMTEK nozzle brush (P/N 901905) to remove build-up.
11. Dry the nozzle and inspect the orifice for blockage.
12. Immerse the nozzle in solvent and store it in a safe place.
13. Perform a Lockout/Tagout procedure as described in 2.15 Lockout of Electrical and
Pneumatic Energy.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 4-41


5 Configuration and Setup
5.1 Overview
Your Select Coat SL-940 Conformal Coating System is configured at the Nordson ASYMTEK factory
prior to shipping. However, if any components have been changed or moved, it may be necessary to
reconfigure them. This section contains the following procedures:

• Setup Sequence • Inverter Configuration

• Pointer Selection • Robot Configuration

• Tool Configuration • Fan Width Configuration

• Fixture Configuration • Needle Finder Configuration

• Conveyor Configuration • Bar Code/Data Matrix Scanner Configuration

5.2 Safety First


Operation of the SL-940 involves heat, air pressure, electrical power, mechanical devices, and the use of
hazardous materials. It is essential that every person servicing or operating the coating system fully
understands all hazards, risks, and safety precautions. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for additional
information.

WARNING! The procedures in this section should only be performed by a trained service
technician.

5.3 Record Keeping


The type of maintenance performed (such as preventive and parts replacement) should be recorded in
maintenance records for the coating system. Dates, part numbers/serial numbers of replaced parts, names
of technicians, and other pertinent data should be recorded.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.4 Setup Sequence


The recommended setup sequence is shown in Figure 5-1. Setup details are described later in this section.

 NOTE This section assumes that the coating system is configured with the Genie Camera.

4. Perform
1. Select Pointer 2. Configure Tool 3. Configure Fixture
Characterization

a. Set Fixture
a. Configure Camera
Constraint Location

b. Teach Relative XY

c. Teach Tool Z Offset

Figure 5-1 Setup Sequence

5.5 Pointer Selection


Prior to performing the system setup, you must select a pointer. This tool will be used for teaching XY
offsets during setup and program creation.
To select a pointer:
1. Start the EasyCoat software. See 4.5 Starting EasyCoat for Windows.
2. Select Edit > Edit Mode to open the Edit Screen.
3. Select Pointer > Genie Camera from the menu bar.

 If your coating system is not configured with a camera, select the applicable pointer
(i.e. tool flange or laser pointer).

Figure 5-2 Selecting a Pointer

5-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6 Tool Configuration


The Tool Configuration window allows you to define the following:

• Camera Configuration: Relationship between pixel size and machine steps.

• Teach Relative XY: XY offset between the camera and the tool.

• Tool Z Offset: Allows the Z offset between multiple applicators to be taught and
stored electronically.

• Calibrate Rotate/Tilt: Calibrates the rotate/tilt feature. This only applies if the fluid
applicator is configured for tilt and/or rotate.

• Characterization: Adjusts program values to compensate for items such as material


type, temperature, viscosity, substrate type, robot velocities, and
dispenser response times. See 4.15 Running a Characterization.
You can also define the fluid shape, tool shape, and tool color in this window. These features are for
graphics display only and are not related to the actual shape and color.
To configure the tool:
1. Select Configure > Tool from the EasyCoat Edit menu.

 The Tool Configuration window opens (Figure 5-3).

Figure 5-3 Tool Configuration Window

2. Select the desired tool tab.

 The following paragraphs define the buttons in the Tool Configuration window.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6.1 Camera Configuration


Configuring the camera creates a relationship between the pixel size seen on the screen and the distance
that the pixel represents in terms of machine steps. This relationship will be unique for each physical
setup because of variations in pattern heights, lenses, tolerance stackups, etc. This relationship will
generate accurately sized reticles, tick marks, movements when clicking in the camera window, and most
importantly, fiducial corrections when using the camera in a fiducial find capacity.
To configure the camera:
1. Make sure that the Genie Camera is selected as the pointer in EasyCoat Edit Mode
(Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4 EasyCoat Edit Screen - Genie Camera Pointer

2. Click on Pointer from the pull-down menu and select Genie Camera.
3. Select Configure > Tool from the Edit Screen menu bar.
4. Select the Genie Camera tab (Figure 5-5).

Figure 5-5 Tool Configuration - Genie Camera

5. Select Configure.

 EasyCoat will prompt you through the configuration process.

5-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

 NOTE This procedure must be accurate in order to capture precise product images.
6. Press OK (Figure 5-6).
 The Genie Camera is automatically selected.

Figure 5-6 Select Teach and Camera Tools

7. Follow the prompt and position the teach tool over the reference point to be used for camera
calibration and press Next (Figure 5-7).
 A good reference point is the corner of a component (i.e. silkscreen on the board) because
it allows the crosshairs to be centered on a point rather than in the center of a shape.

Figure 5-7 Position the Teach Tool over a Reference Point

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

8. Follow the prompt and position the camera crosshairs over the same reference point and
press Next (Figure 5-8).

Figure 5-8 Position the Camera Crosshairs over the Reference Point

9. Using the mouse, click on the calibration point (green crosshairs) in the vision window and
select Next (Figure 5-9).

 NOTE You may be prompted to perform this step several times.

Figure 5-9 Click on the Calibration Point with the Mouse

10. Repeat Step 9 until prompted to perform Step 11.

5-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

11. Click on the video display to move the robot to position crosshairs to that location and
select Next (Figure 5-10).

 The calibration screen closes and you will return to the Tool Configuration window.

Figure 5-10 Click on the Video Display

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6.2 Teach Relative XY


Teach relative XY is used to define XY offsets between the camera and the tool tip. This feature supports
the needle finder option, but it is useful for dual-applicator systems as well. With dual-applicators, it is
used to set the offset of one applicator using another as a reference.

WARNING! If tool offsets have already been defined and set up in the tool library, correct
offsets are displayed in the Tool Configuration window. DO NOT change them
without assistance from Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.

To teach XY offsets between the camera and tool tip:


1. Click on Configure > Tools from the Edit Screen menu bar.

 The Tool Configuration window opens (Figure 5-3).


2. Select the desired tool tab.

 NOTE Some tools have multiple soft-tools for a single physical tool. For example, the
SC-300 has five soft tools (bead, monofilament, swirl, high air, and low air) for
one physical applicator. It is only necessary to change the offsets for one of the
soft-tools. Offsets for the remainder of the soft-tools automatically update.
3. Load a board.
4. Click Teach Relative XY in the Tool Configuration window for your selected tool.
5. When prompted to confirm, select OK (Figure 5-11).

Figure 5-11 Confirm Tool Offset Adjustment

 You will be prompted to select a reference tool.

5-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

6. Click the to access the drop-down list, select the reference tool, and click OK
(Figure 5-12).

 The reference tool will typically be the Genie Camera.

Figure 5-12 Selecting a Reference Tool

 NOTE To ensure accurate positioning when teaching coating programs, offsets should
be taught relative to the camera. If the system does not have a camera, teach the
offset relative to the applicable pointer.

 You will then be prompted to teach the tool reference point (Figure 5-13).

 Choose an easily recognizable location (a small mark) on the board. As an alternative,


you can place a small flattened piece of putty on the substrate.

Figure 5-13 Teaching the Tool Reference Point

7. Use small steps to slowly move the tool tip over the mark.

 If you are using putty, move the tool tip down into the putty just enough to make an
impression on the surface. Be careful not to move the tool tip down too far. You may
and damage the board.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

8. Click on OK.

 You will be prompted to move the reference tool to the same position (Figure 5-14).

Figure 5-14 Teaching the Reference Tool Offset

9. Move the robot to its upper limit and position the camera crosshairs over the mark.
10. Click OK.

 Offsets for the tool have been taught relative to the camera.
11. Repeat the above procedure for each tool.

 NOTE If the offsets for the tool or camera are changed (needle is replaced and no needle sensor
is present, camera is removed or replaced, etc.) tool offsets should be redefined.
If a camera is not present, the XY offsets can be performed using a separate tool that has
already been configured.

5-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6.3 Tool Z Offset


The tool Z offset feature allows the Z offset between multiple applicators to be taught and stored
electronically. When configuring a new machine, EasyCoat calibrates and stores the offset for each
configured tool from the default position to its toggled state. Running the tool Z offset procedure allows
the software to determine the Z offset between the tools.
If you are creating a new program and tool Z offsets have not been previously defined, you will be
prompted to teach the tool Z offset during the program creation process.

 NOTE Tool Z offsets only need to be defined once, after the applicator has been installed. If you
install an applicator that has not previously been configured, you will need to run the
EasyCoat reconfiguration procedure prior to running tool Z offsets.
To teach tool Z offset:
1. Click on Configure > Tool Z Offset from the Edit Screen menu bar.

 You will be prompted to teach the XY location to use for teaching/calibrating the
Z offset (Figure 5-15).

Figure 5-15 Teach XY Location for Z Offset

2. Choose an easily recognizable location (a small mark) on the conveyor rail or a fixed
surface near the dispensing station.
3. Center the camera crosshairs over the small mark and select Teach XY (Figure 5-15).

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

4. You will then be prompted to teach the Z location for all applicators. (Figure 5-16).

 The software automatically selects the first configured tool. If you want to teach the XY
location for a specific tool, select it from the tool drop-down list.

Figure 5-16 Teach Applicator Z Location

5. Move the tool down in the Z-axis until it lightly touches the targeted surface.

 The system will error and reinitialize if the tool tip is moved down too far.

 If the tool is not installed, set the Z value to (-1).


6. Click on Teach Z.
7. Click on Next.

 You will be prompted to confirm changes (Figure 5-17).

Figure 5-17 Save Changes

8. Click on OK.
9. If more than one tool is configured, you will be prompted to teach the Z value for the
next tool.

 EasyCoat automatically populates the next reference tool.


10. Repeat Step 5 through Step 8 until all tools are taught.

5-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

11. When finished, you will receive the following message (Figure 5-18).

Figure 5-18 Tool Z Offset Complete

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6.4 Calibrate Rotate/Tilt


This step is required only if your tool is configured with the 4-axis tilt mechanism or the 5-axis rotate
mechanism.
1. Select Configure > Tool from the Edit Screen menu bar.
2. Select the desired applicator tab.
3. Click on Calibrate Rotate/Tilt (Figure 5-19).

 This button will be grayed out if the system is not configured for rotate and/or tilt.

Figure 5-19 Tool Configuration - Calibrate Rotate/Tilt

 You will be prompted to define the reference position six times for different rotate/tilt
positions.
4. Move the film coater to the reference position and click on OK (Figure 5-20).

Figure 5-20 Move Applicator to Reference Position

 The applicator will tilt slightly and you will be asked to move to the reference position
again.

5-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5. Repeat Step 4 until you receive the Calibration Complete message (Figure 5-21).

Figure 5-21 Calibration Complete

6. Click on OK.

 You will then be prompted to confirm the reference positions (Figure 5-22).

Figure 5-22 Confirm Reference Position

7. Click on OK when prompted that the system is about to move to reference position 1.
8. Repeat Step 7 until you have confirmed all six reference positions.

 After you have confirmed all reference positions, you will be prompted that the system
is about to move to safe Z (Figure 5-23).

Figure 5-23 Confirm Safe Z

9. Click on OK.

 You will return to the Tool Configuration window.


10. Click on Close to close the window (Figure 5-19).

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-15


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6.5 Fluid Shape


The fluid shape lets you enter the diameter of the fluid. This feature pertains to the graphic display only.
The actual dispensed diameter is determined during the characterization procedure.
To define the fluid shape:
1. Select Fluid Shape from the Tool Configuration window.
2. Enter the fluid diameter (Figure 5-24).

 NOTE The diameter entered will not change the actual fluid diameter determined
during the characterization.
3. Select Save.

Figure 5-24 Tool Configuration - Fluid Shape

5.6.6 Tool Shape


The tool shape lets you define the shape and diameter of the tool. This feature is applicator dependent and
pertains to the graphic display only.
To define the tool shape:
1. Select Tool Shape from the Tool Configuration window.
2. Select the desired tool shape and enter the diameter (Figure 5-25).
3. Select Save.

Figure 5-25 Tool Configuration - Tool Shape

5-16 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.6.7 Choose Color


This feature allows you to select the coating color to be displayed on the screen for the selected tool. Each
tool can have a different color. This is beneficial when programming with multiple tools.
To select the color:
1. In the Tool Configuration window, select the desired tool tab.
2. Select Choose Color.
3. Select the desired tool color and click on OK.

Figure 5-26 Tool Configuration - Choose Color

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-17


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.7 Fixture Configuration


Fixture refers to the location at which products are physically constrained in the workcell. It consists of
both position (XYZ) coordinates and a corner constraint (Front Left, Front Right, Back Left, or Back
Right). On inline systems, the fixture is typically the combination of a clamp and a stop pin. On batch
systems, it is usually a fixed constraint.

5.7.1 Fixture Constraint Location


EasyCoat uses the fixture constraint coordinates and the length and width of the board or carrier to
determine the main pattern edit frame coordinates. The fixture constraint location is the corner of the
product that is always in the same location when the product is in the fixture (the repeatable corner)
(Figure 5-27). The part origin (0,0 XY location) is calculated with the length and width values relative to
the fixture.
Inline systems will typically use a front corner as the constraint location, because the fixed rail is located
at the front of the workcell. For example, if the conveyor movement (product flow) is from left to right,
and the fixed rail is the front rail, the constraint location is Front Right. If the conveyor movement
(product flow) is right to left, the constraint location is Front Left. The left/right position is dictated by
the location of the board stop relative to the board.

 NOTE The stop location does not indicate the constraint location. If the front rail is fixed and the
product flow is left-to-right, the constraint is Front Right, even if the stop is mounted on
the rear rail.

Constraint is Back Left Constraint is Back Right

2 2

Z Y Z Y

1 X 1 X

Constraint is Front Left Constraint is Front Right

Z Y Z Y

2
1, 2 X 1 X

1. Main Pattern Edit Frame


2. Repeatable Corner

Figure 5-27 Fixture Constraint Location

After the fixture has been configured, clicking the GoTo Tool button should move the applicator,
selected in the Tool drop down menu, to the front left corner of the product. If not, verify that the fixture
location has been properly defined.

5-18 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.7.2 Configuring a Fixture on Systems Equipped with a Camera


Prior to configuring the fixture, you must:
• Install the fluid applicator.
• Position the board on the conveyor.
• Adjust the board sensor, stop pins, and board clamps as necessary.
To configure a fixture on systems equipped with a camera:
1. If necessary, install the fluid applicator.

 The applicator and nozzle must be installed before teaching the X coordinate and
Y coordinate. Refer to the applicable fluid applicator or coating system manual for
instructions.

 If the applicator has just been installed, you must perform a tool configuration before
continuing. See 5.6 Tool Configuration.
2. Press [F4] to open the camera window and move it to the far upper left position.
3. Resize the EasyCoat Operator and Edit Screens so that the camera window crosshairs are
visible at the left side of the screen, behind the Operator and Edit screens.
4. Click on Configure > Fixtures on the EasyCoat Edit Screen menu bar.

 The Fixture Configuration window opens (Figure 5-28).

Figure 5-28 EasyCoat Fixture Configuration

5. Click on the tab for the fixture you are configuring.

 There will be a separate tab for each fixture configured in EasyCoat. The default fixture
is Fixture A.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-19


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

6. Teach the coordinates as described below. See Figure 5-30 for coordinate locations. This
example is for a front-right constraint, which is the normal setting for an inline system with
left-to-right conveyor.
a. Move the robot until the camera crosshairs are directly over the corner edges of the
constrained board.
b. Click Teach X to teach the X coordinate and click Teach Y to teach the Y coordinate.
7. Select the fluid applicator from the drop-down list (Figure 5-29).

Figure 5-29 Select the Fluid Applicator


8. Carefully lower the nozzle until it just touches the surface of the board (Front View Z
Coordinate - Figure 5-30).
9. To teach the Z coordinate, click on the Teach Z button.
10. Click on Close when done.

Board
Board Travel Stop

Use this edge to “Teach X”

Top View Y
X

Use this edge to “Teach Y”


Use this surface to “Teach Z”
Use the applicator with the smallest coating height

Front View
X

Figure 5-30 Teaching "Front Right" XYZ Coordinates

5-20 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.8 Conveyor Configuration


To configure the conveyor settings:
1. Click on Configure > Conveyor Settings from the EasyCoat Edit menu.

 The Conveyor Settings window opens (Figure 5-31).

 NOTE The Conveyor Settings window also contains inverter configuration settings.
See 5.9 Inverter Configuration later in this section.
2. Enter the desired property values.

 See Table 5-1 for a description and default value for each property.
3. Click OK when done.

Figure 5-31 Conveyor Settings Window

Table 5-1 Conveyor Settings Options


Property Description Default Value
Belt Acceleration Rate at which the conveyor belt accelerates. 98.4 in./sec
Belt Speed Speed at which the conveyor belt moves. 98.4 in./sec
If True, only one attempt is made to unload the board to the
downstream machine. If no SMEMA acknowledgement is
received, then production continues. If False and no
Blind Unload SMEMA acknowledgement is received, an error occurs and False
production stops. Typically, this property is set to True to
avoid product unload errors when the downstream machine
is a non-SMEMA device, such as a curing oven.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-21


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

Property Description Default Value


Distance to move the board to clear the board stop. During a
manual unload, the conveyor stops when the fixture sensor
Clear Stop Move no longer detects the board, however the board may not 1.181 in.
clear the stop. Use this setting to move the board the
additional distance required to move it from under the stop.
Distance to move the board to the board stop pin after the
transport move is completed and the fixture sensor detects
Debounce Move 0.394 in.
the board. This ensures that the board is tight against the
stop.
Select SMEMA when there is a downstream machine.
Select Sensor when an inline system is being unloaded
Downstream Device SMEMA
manually. Select Jumper when there is no downstream
machine and the SMEMA connectors are jumpered.
Distance to move board to help transfer it to the next
Exit Boost 0
conveyor in the system. Used to help speed production.
The time required for a solvent based material to lose most
Flash Time 15
of its solvent through evaporation.
If True, the conveyor moves from left to right. If False, the
Left to Right True
conveyor moves from right to left.
If False, this function is turned off. If True, the robot
controller sends a signal to the upstream machine
Load While Unloading False
requesting a new board at the same time it is moving the
just-processed board to the downstream machine.
Number of times the conveyor controller attempts to load a
board into workcell fixture. If the fixture sensor does not
Max Retries 4
detect a board after the designated number of tries,
production is stopped and an error message is displayed.
If False, boards are processed before being passed to the
Pass Through downstream machine. If True, boards are passed to the False
downstream machine without processing.
If False, boards are conveyed to the downstream machine
after processing. If True, the conveyor reverses and moves
Recycle Mode the board back to the beginning where it is reloaded for False
another processing cycle. The distance is the Recycle
Move.
Distance to move the board upstream before reloading
Recycle Move (inches) 20 in.
when recycle mode is set to True.
Distance the conveyor moves before the next part is loaded.
Spacing Move (inches) This is used to make sure you have adequate space 0
between parts.
Distance to move the conveyor when loading a board into
Transport Move (inches) the fixture. This distance should be greater than the distance 40 in.
from the beginning of the conveyor to the board stop.
Select SMEMA when there is an upstream machine. Select
Sensor when an inline system is being loaded manually.
Upstream Device SMEMA
Select Jumper when there is no upstream machine and the
SMEMA connectors are jumpered.
Set to "True" when the board unloads on the same side as it
Upstream Unload False
was loaded.

5-22 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.9 Inverter Configuration


 NOTE You may configure the inverter through the conveyor configuration window or through
the reconfigure function. The recommended method is through the conveyor
configuration window. If you use the reconfigure function, all conveyor settings are reset
to the factory defaults. You will need to restore any customized settings. The following
procedure uses the conveyor configuration window. The reconfigure method is detailed
in the EasyCoat User Guide.
To configure the inverter:
1. Click on Configure > Conveyor Settings from the EasyCoat Edit menu.

 The Conveyor Settings window shown in Figure 5-31 opens.


2. Enter the desired values.

 See Table 5-2 for a description and default value for each property.
3. Click OK when done.

Table 5-2 Inverter Settings


Property Description Default Value
Distance to move the board into the inverter. This move is
Invert Move 1 used when the inverter is upstream and must be a negative -39 in.
value.
Distance to move the board upstream after it passes the
fixture sensor. This move is only used when the inverter is
Invert Move 2 -1.2 in.
downstream. This move is a safety factor to prevent damage
to the board and must be a negative value.
Time to wait for the board to be sent to the inverter and return.
The timeout counter starts when the conveyor sends the
Inverter Time Out board to the inverter. If the inverted board fails to load into the 15 sec.
fixture before the timeout interval expires, production stops
and the "Board Failed To Load" error message appears.
Inverter Type Settings are Upstream or Downstream. Upstream

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-23


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.10 Robot Configuration


Robot configuration allows you to set the following:
• Safe Z Height
• Speed Limit
• Z Speed

5.10.1 Safe Z Height


Safe Z height is the height below which the tool tip cannot go when moving from one set of coordinates
to another during operation. Safe Z height is determined by choosing a height that ensures that the fluid
applicator, camera, or robot does not collide with any obstacles while traveling around the coating area.
To set the safe Z height:
1. Click on Configure > Robot Settings from the EasyCoat Edit menu bar.

 The Robot Settings window opens (Figure 5-32).

Figure 5-32 Robot Settings Window

2. Move the robot until the tool tip is above any component on the boards you are coating, and
any other component in the workcell with which the tool tip could collide.
3. Select the SafeZ (inches) value field.

 When you click on the SafeZ (inches) value field, the Teach Field button appears.

4. Click on the Teach Field button.

 The value entered is the current Z-coordinate of the tool tip, should be negative.

 If you wish to edit this value manually, select the property field and enter a new value.

5.10.2 Speed Limit


This value adjusts the program run speed and should be used in dry mode only. To edit the speed limit,
enter the desired value and click on OK.

5.10.3 Z Speed
This value is the maximum robot Z speed. Z speed may be altered if dips or other related issues occur. To
edit the Z speed, enter the desired value and click on OK.

5-24 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.11 Fan Width Configuration


If your system is equipped with the optional laser fan width control feature, you will need to perform a
fan width setup. For additional information, refer to the manual for your fan width control system or
contact your Nordson ASYMTEK representative.
To perform a fan width setup:
1. Set the air pressure for the tool whose fan width is to be configured.
a. Move the tool over the drain cup.
b. Select Utilities > Pressure Adjust > Toolname from the EasyCoat Edit menu.
c. Turn on the fluid and adjust the fluid pressure until you see a good, clean fan pattern.

d. Turn off the fluid and close the Pressure Adjust window by clicking on the in the
upper right corner of the window.
2. Select Configure > Fan Width Setup > Toolname from the EasyCoat Edit menu.

 The Fan Width Control configuration window (Figure 5-33) opens.

Figure 5-33 Fan Width Control Configuration Window

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-25


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

3. Click Find Nozzle End.


a. Click No if the applicator is not in beam path and proceed with Step b. Otherwise, click
Yes and skip to Step c.

b. Move the nozzle into the beam.


c. Click OK.
 The applicator will move to locate nozzle tip.
4. Click Sensor Setup.

 The applicator will momentarily spray a fan pattern through the beam to calibrate the
amplifier threshold settings for the fluid.
5. Click Teach Width to correlate the pressure set in Step 1 with the fan width.
6. Enter the desired width in the Width (in air) field and press the [Tab] key.
7. Click Control Width to control the pressure until the desired fan width pattern is reached.

 This pressure will override any pressure adjustment done in the Pressure Adjust
window to ensure that your pressure generates the desired width.

 NOTE It is recommended to add a periodic procedure containing a control width or


check width command to the coating program to ensure consistent fan width.
The fan pattern width may change throughout the day as the temperature
changes or when using a new batch of material.

5-26 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

Table 5-3 Fan Width Control Configuration Options


Category Item Description
Use 0 degrees for laser beam parallel to Y-axis, 90 degrees for
Sensor Fixture Rotation
laser beam parallel to X-axis.
Displays the X, Y, and Z coordinates captured during the find
XYZ Values
nozzle end routine. These values CANNOT be typed in manually.
Establishes the threshold of the amplifier that is used for
detecting the edge of the fan pattern. This button runs the FWC
Sensor Setup Sensor Setup macro in the Macro1.ecm file. The factory default
routine will move the center of the applicator tip to 0.30 inches
above the laser beam and will turn the fluid stream on.
Locate Gun
Barrel Establishes the position that the fan width control functions are
performed. Software prompts the user to move the applicator tip
Find Nozzle End
over the drain pan, then automatically determines the center of
the barrel and records the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
This value must be typed in manually the first time. The value can
be 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. This is the position that the
Rotate
applicator will rotate so that the fan pattern is perpendicular to the
laser beam.
The target fan width used for the production process. This value
is used during the control width routine and is used to calculate
Width (In Air) the offset and warning tolerances. If the desired width in air is
known, it can be typed in manually, but a control width procedure
must then be performed to update the offsets.
Displays the height the nozzle tip is positioned above the beam to
Height perform the measure, teach, and control width functions. This
(for Reference) value cannot be typed in manually. This value is the height
established in the tool characterization process.
Overall fan width (In Air) ± 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) by default.
Width Tolerance Example: If the target fan width is 12.7 mm (0.500 inch) and the
Warning measure width is greater than 13.08 mm (0.515 inch) or less than
(See Figure 5-34) 12.3 mm (0.485 inch), a yellow warning message is logged in the
production event monitor.
Overall fan width (In Air) ± 0.76 mm (0.030 inch) by default.
Teach Width Example: If the target fan width is 12.7 mm (0.500 inch) and the
Width Tolerance
Error measure width is greater than 13.46 mm (0.530 inch) or less than
11.94 mm (0.470 inch), the program will stop or run a user-
(See Figure 5-34) defined error procedure. A red error message is logged in the
production event monitor.
Difference between the center of the fan pattern and the center of
Offset Tolerance
the nozzle tip. Default value is 0.38 mm (0.015 inch). If exceeded,
Warning
a yellow warning message is logged in the production event
(See Figure 5-34)
monitor.
Offset Tolerance Difference between the center of the fan pattern and the center of
Error the nozzle tip. Default value is 0.76 mm (0.030 inch). If exceeded,
(See Figure 5-34) a red warning message is logged in the production event monitor.
Measures the width corresponding to the current fluid system
Teach Width settings and records the value in the width (In Air) display box.
Button This value will then be the new target fan width used in
subsequent control width routines.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-27


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

Table 5-3 Fan Width Control Configuration Options (Continued)


Category Item Description
Pressing this button will first run the locate nozzle end instruction
and update the XYZ nozzle position. After the nozzle is
successfully located, the Control Width algorithm will start to run.
The Control Width will automatically adjust the fluid pressure until
Control Width the target width (Width In Air) is achieved.

Test
 NOTE After teaching a new target width, running Control
Width will update the offsets between the fan
pattern and nozzle centers.
Measures the width corresponding to the current fluid system
settings and records the value in the width (In Air) display box.
Measure Width
This value will then be the new target fan width used in
subsequent control width routines.

Description Default Values


Target Width (T.W.) 12.7 mm (0.50 inch)
Width Tolerance Warning (W.T.) 0.38 mm (0.015 inch)
Width Tolerance Error (E.T.) 0.76 mm (0.030 inch)
Offset Tolerance Warning 0.38 mm (0.015 inch)
Offset Tolerance Error 0.76 mm (0.030 inch)
Figure 5-34 Fan Width Tolerance

5-28 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.12 Needle Finder Configuration


Needle-type nozzles are easily damaged or frequently changed. The needle finder option locates the
current location of the needle tip, compares the current location with the last measured location, and
adjusts the tool offset to maintain consistent dispensing results.
The needle finder support in EasyCoat includes two programming instructions, Find Needle and Check
Needle. The instructions are located on the Needle Finder tab, which only appears when the system is
configured for a needle finder. For additional information, refer to the EasyCoat User Guide.

 NOTE This procedure should be done on initial setup and whenever there is a change in the
board stop location or fixed conveyor rail position, or if the needle finder is moved.
To setup the needle finder:
1. Be sure that the needle-tipped applicator is the active tool.

 This will ensure that the tool is toggled down (if appropriate and that the tool is
rotated/tilted to 0 degrees.
2. In the EasyCoat Edit screen, click on Configure > Needle Finder Setup to open the Needle
Finder Setup window (Figure 5-35).

Figure 5-35 Needle Finder Setup Window

3. Teach the X Beam Location by moving the needle into the X beam. The needle finder
indicator will turn green when the needle is intersecting the laser beam. Click on the Teach
button and follow the prompts.

 The X beam is the beam that determines the X position of the applicator and is
contained in the trough of the needle sensor that is parallel to the machine's X-axis.
4. Teach the Y Beam Location by moving the needle into the Y beam. The needle finder
indicator will turn green when the needle is intersecting the laser beam. Click on the Teach
button and follow the prompts.

 The Y beam is the beam that determines the Y position of the applicator and is
contained in the trough of the needle sensor that is parallel to the machine's Y-axis.
5. Enter tolerance values to set the out-of-position tolerances used by EasyCoat to generate an
error and call the procedure named in the Find Needle or Check Needle error procedure
properties.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 5-29


SL-940 IOM Manual Configuration and Setup

5.13 Bar Code/Data Matrix Scanner Configuration


Bar code scanners can be used to load product programs. If your system is equipped with the optional bar
code/data matrix scanner, you will need to perform a scanner configuration. For additional information,
refer to your scanner manual or contact your Nordson ASYMTEK representative.

5.13.1 Bar Codes


When production is running, the raw scanned codes are compared to the part number of each entry in the
product map. The product program for the matching part number is then loaded. The last scanned entry
prior to the product's arrival at the coating station is used to lookup the product program.

5.13.1.1 Wildcards

To add flexibility to the bar code system, wildcard characters can be used in the part number field. See
Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Wildcard Characters
Wildcard Description
* Represents zero (0) or more characters
? Represents one (1) character

Example:
The program XYZ01.EasyCoat is used to coat all boards with a barcode beginning with XYZ.
1. Enter XYZ* in the Part Number field and XYZ01.EasyCoat in the Filename field.
2. From the Operator Screen, click on the Change Product button, and select the part number
you just created.

 The XYZ01.EasyCoat program is loaded whenever a product with a barcode beginning


with XYZ is scanned.

5.13.1.2 Wildcard Multiple Match Scoring

When wildcards are used, EasyCoat scores multiple matches depending on the number of characters
matched. The match with the highest score is selected. When the scoring results in a tie, an error is
generated.

 NOTE Wildcard characters are configurable. To change the wildcard characters, you must edit
the following entries in the [IDSystemManager] section of the EasyCoat.INI file.
MultipleLetterWildCard = *
SingleLetterWildCard = ?

5-30 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


6 Maintenance
6.1 Overview
Following a routine maintenance schedule and procedures can prevent part degradation and ensure high
quality performance for every production run. This section covers the following topics:

• Record Keeping • Focusing the Camera

• Routine Maintenance Procedures • Removing and Installing the Axis Covers

• Cleaning the Spill Pan • Lubricating the Cables and Linear Guides

• Draining the Water Trap • Tensioning the Cables

• Cleaning the Fluid Filter • Tensioning the Conveyor Chains

6.2 Safety First


Operation of the SL-940 involves heat, air pressure, electrical power, mechanical devices, and the use of
hazardous materials. It is essential that every person servicing or operating the coating system fully
understands all hazards, risks, and safety precautions. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for additional
information.

WARNING! The procedures in this section should only be performed by a trained service
technician.

WARNING! Consult the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for all fluids used with the coating system.
The SDS provides material usage instructions, disposal instructions, and safety
precautions.

WARNING! If the coating system is equipped with a ventilation system, make sure the coating
system ventilation is ON during handling and cleanup of all materials used with
the coating system.

6.3 Record Keeping


The type of maintenance performed (such as preventive and parts replacement) should be recorded in
maintenance records for the coating system. Dates, part numbers/serial numbers of replaced parts, names
of technicians, and other pertinent data should be recorded.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.4 Routine Maintenance Procedures

WARNING! Before performing any of the maintenance procedures in this section, perform a
service shutdown described in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.

 NOTE The following maintenance procedures are for the SL-940 Conformal Coating Systems.
Refer to the appropriate manual for recommended maintenance procedures for your
specific coating applicator.
Routine maintenance procedures and required intervals are listed in Table 6-1. It is also recommended
that you follow all procedures listed in 4.11 Daily Routine Procedures.

Table 6-1 Routine Maintenance Procedures


Task Frequency Instructions
Remove spilled fluids with the manufacturer’s recommended
solvent and a soft cloth. Remove any foreign objects from
the dispensing area and ventilation holes.
Clean Dispensing Area Daily  NOTE Make sure the coating system ventilation is
ON during handling and cleanup of all
materials used with the coating system. DO
NOT cover ventilation holes.
Clean Spill Pan Daily See 6.5 Cleaning the Spill Pan.
Clean Fluid Filter Weekly Replace as necessary. Refer to 6.7 Cleaning the Fluid Filter.
Check the water level in the water trap and empty if full. See
Drain Water Trap Weekly
6.6 Draining the Water Trap.
Check conveyor guards for alignment and security. Inspect
Check Conveyor Weekly
conveyor chains for proper tension.
Inspect coating system for broken, loose, worn, or missing
Inspect Hardware Weekly
hardware. Replace or repair as necessary.
Inspect Electrical and Inspect coating system for broken, loose, or frayed electrical
Weekly
Pneumatic Lines and pneumatic lines. Replace as necessary.
Check Air Cylinders Monthly Check for leakage.
Every 6 months
Lubricate the XY Cables
Quarterly for See 6.10 Lubricating the Cables and Linear Guides.
and Linear Guides
24/7 use
Tension Mechanical Drive Every 6-12
See 6.11 Tensioning the Cables.
Cables months
Empty and clean purge cups. Follow SDS recommendations
Empty Purge Cups As Needed
for the proper handling and disposal of all materials.
Refill Solvent Cups As Needed Refill as needed.
Clean Camera Lens
As Needed Use the cleaning kit provided.
(if applicable)
Tension Conveyor Chains As Needed See 6.12 Tensioning the Conveyor Chains.
Replace Conveyor Chains As Needed See 8.11.1 Replacing Conveyor Chains.

6-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.5 Cleaning the Spill Pan


The spill pan is in the front cabinet and captures fluid spills and overspray. The spill pan should be
cleaned regularly and is removable for ease of cleaning.

WARNING! Follow SDS recommendations for the proper handling and disposal of all
materials when cleaning the spill pan. Always wear appropriate Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) as recommended by facility safety practices and the
material manufacturer’s SDS.

 NOTE Make sure the ventilation is ON while cleaning the spill pan.
1. Slide the spill pan from the lower front cabinet (Figure 6-1).
2. Thoroughly clean the spill pan with the solvent recommended by the fluid manufacturer.
3. Slide the spill pan all the way in.

 The spill pan is interlocked for safety. If the spill pan is not pushed in properly, the
coating system will not start.

 NOTE Keep the spill pan free of debris. DO NOT use the spill pan for storage.

Item Description
1 Spill Pan
Figure 6-1 Spill Pan

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.6 Draining the Water Trap


Because the facility air supply may contain moisture that can damage the coating system, the SL-940 is
equipped with a water trap that condenses this moisture before it enters the pneumatic system. The
operator or technician must drain the water trap weekly or whenever it is full.
Tools and Materials Needed:

• Container for waste water


To empty the water trap:

 NOTE The following procedure is for the water trap at the rear of the coating system. If the
system water trap is connected to a bulk reservoir, the bulk reservoir should be drained as
needed.
1. Locate the water trap at the rear of the system (Figure 6-2).
2. Shut off facility air pressure and disconnect the facility air supply from the main air
pressure regulator inlet.
3. Hold a container under the water traps to catch the water and open the water drain knob by
turning counterclockwise.
4. After the trap has been drained, close the water trap drain knob by turning clockwise.
5. Reconnect the facility air supply to the main air pressure regulator inlet.

Item Description
1 Main Air Inlet
2 Drain Knob
3 Water Trap

Figure 6-2 Water Trap

6-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.7 Cleaning the Fluid Filter

WARNING! Follow SDS recommendations for the proper handling and disposal of all
materials when cleaning the fluid filter. Always wear appropriate Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) as recommended by facility safety practices and the
material manufacturer’s SDS. To prevent eye injury or irritation, wear safety
goggles while performing this procedure.

To clean the fluid filter:

1. Turn the applicable reservoir air pressure switch(es) to the OFF (0) position (Figure 6-3A).

2. Relieve residual pressure in the fluid system by opening the pressure relief valve on the
fluid reservoir (Figure 6-3B).

Figure 6-3A Coating System Rear Panel Figure 6-3B Fluid Reservoir

Item Description
1 Reservoir Air Pressure Switches
2 Fluid Reservoir Pressure Relief Valve
Figure 6-3 Relieving the Air Pressure

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

3. Drain fluid from the filter assembly by opening the ball valve (Figure 6-4).
4. Unscrew the fluid filter cap.

 The fluid filter is located inside the housing.

5. Remove the filter and clean it with a proper solvent.

6. Brush the stainless-steel screen with the appropriate solvent. Replace if necessary.

7. Blow filter surface with compressed air.

8. When finished, reassemble the filter and turn the reservoir air pressure switch to the
reservoir A or reservoir B position as applicable.

Item Description
1 Fluid Filter Spring
2 Fluid Filter
3 Housing
4 Ball Valve

Figure 6-4 Cleaning the Fluid Filter

6-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.8 Focusing the Camera


If the camera is out of focus, you must refocus the camera prior to configuring the camera pixel size. See
5.6.1 Camera Configuration.
To focus the camera:
1. Position the camera over an easily recognized feature on the substrate.
2. Loosen the thumb screws on the focal ring (Figure 6-5).
3. Twist the focal ring until a sharp image is obtained.
4. Tighten the thumb screw.
5. Loosen the thumb screws on the F-stop ring (Figure 6-5).
6. Twist the F-stop ring until the desired lighting is obtained. Twist the ring one click brighter
so that when the door closes, the lighting is correct.
7. Tighten the thumb screws.

 The camera is now ready for use.

1
2

Item Description
1 F-Stop Ring
2 Focal Ring
3 Light Ring (Fiducial Find Camera Only)
Figure 6-5 Focusing the Camera

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.9 Removing and Installing the Axis Covers


To lubricate the cables and linear guides and to tension the cables, it will be necessary to remove
the X-axis, Y-axis, and rear cable covers.

6.9.1 X-Axis Cable Cover


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the X-axis cable cover:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the X-axis cable cover to the X-axis (Figure 6-6).
4. Remove the X-axis cable cover.

Item Description
1 Screws (2) (P/N 7252899)
2 X-Axis Cable Cover
Figure 6-6 X-Axis Cable Cover

To install the X-axis cable cover:


1. Install the two (2) screws securing the X-axis cable cover to the X-axis (Figure 6-6).
2. Torque the two (2) screws to 25 in-lbs.
3. Close the front hood.

6-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover


This procedure is for both left or right Y-axis cable cover.
Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the Y-axis cable cover:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the top cover. See 8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover.
4. Remove the three (3) screws securing the Y-axis cable cover to the Y-axis (Figure 6-7).
5. Remove the Y-axis cable cover.

Item Description
1 Y-Axis Cable Cover
2 Screws (3) (P/N 7252899)
Figure 6-7 Y-Axis Cable Cover
To install the Y-axis cable cover:
1. Install three (3) screws securing the Y-axis cable cover to the Y-axis (Figure 6-7).
2. Torque the three (3) screws to 50 in-lbs.
3. Install the top cover. See 8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover.
4. Close the front hood.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.9.3 Rear Cable Covers


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the rear cable covers:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Remove the eight (8) screws securing the rear cable covers to the coating system
(Figure 6-8).
4. Remove the rear cable covers.
2
1

Item Description
1 Screws (2) (P/N 388026)
2 Rear Cable Covers
Figure 6-8 Rear Cable Covers

To install the rear cable covers:


1. Install the eight (8) screws securing the rear cable covers to the coating system (Figure 6-8).
2. Torque the eight (8) screws to 25 in-lbs.
3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

6-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.10 Lubricating the Cables and Linear Guides


The XYZ-axes cables support the robot and allow it to travel within the dispensing area. To ensure
smooth movement, the cables and linear guides must be lubricated.

 NOTE To perform the following procedures, you will need the Nordson ASYMTEK Grease Kit
(P/N 7212878). The kit contains a grease pump, two cartridges of grease, and a lint-free
cloth.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Safety Glasses • Soft, Lint-free Cloth (P/N 7282236)

• Rubber Gloves • 3 oz Tube Molly-Graph Grease (P/N 198773)

• Nozzle, 3mm NSK Grease (P/N 392456) • NSK Grease Pump (P/N 392455)

 NOTE Refer Appendix A - Material Safety Information for the SDS for the Moly-Graph Grease.

6.10.1 Loading the Grease Gun


To load the grease gun:
1. Unscrew and remove the grease pump from the grease gun canister.
2. Remove the cap from the grease cartridge.
3. Remove the seal and screw the grease cartridge into the grease pump.
4. Fit the canister of the grease gun over the grease cartridge and screw into the grease pump.
5. Screw the nozzle into the grease pump.
6. Screw the grease fitting adapter into the nozzle.
7. Purge the air from the grease gun cartridge by dispensing grease into a waste receptacle
until a solid stream flows from the grease gun.

6.10.2 Lubricating the Cables


To lubricate the cables:
1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Remove the axis and cable covers as described in 6.9 Removing and Installing the Axis
Covers.
3. Open the coating system hood and move the dispensing head to the front middle of the
dispensing area.
4. Wearing gloves, clean all accessible cables using a soft lint-free cloth (P/N 7282236).

 DO NOT clean the cables with Isopropyl Alcohol. Doing so will damage the nylon
jacket.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

WARNING! Use Personal Protective Equipment when working with cleaning and lubrication
materials. Refer to the applicable SDS. Remove all spills and properly dispose of
contaminated materials.

5. Visually inspect the cables for uneven and excessive wear.

 NOTE If the cables show signs of wear, skip this procedure and contact Nordson
ASYMTEK. If the cables show no signs of wear, proceed with the next step.
6. Wearing rubber gloves, manually apply 2.8-3.0 grams of Moly-Graph Grease to
the exposed portion of all mechanical cables.

 2.8-3.0 grams is the amount Nordson ASYMTEK has determined to be optimal for
performance without spattering the grease from cables to parts. If you are experiencing
this issue, reduce the amount of grease on the cables.
7. Move the X-beam to the rear of the machine and apply grease to all exposed cables on the
left and right sides of the machine.

WARNING! Fingers may be pinched if the dispensing head is moved while cleaning and
lubricating the cables.

8. Move the X-beam to the front of the machine and apply grease to all exposed cables on the
left and right sides of the machine.
9. Move the Z-head to the left side of the X-beam and apply grease to all exposed cables on
the X-beam.
10. Move the Z-head to the right side of the X-beam and apply grease to all exposed cables on
the X-beam.
11. While an assistant is moving the X-beam SLOWLY in the Y-direction from bump stop to
bump stop, apply grease to the exposed cables near the Y-motor drive pulley.
12. While an assistant is moving the X-beam SLOWLY in the X-direction from bump stop to
bump stop, apply grease to the exposed cables near the X-motor drive pulley.

 NOTE Do not apply grease directly to the drive pulleys or cable pulleys as this will
over grease the mechanics.
13. Manually exercise the X/Y mechanics fully in all directions.
14. Wipe excess grease off drive pulleys, motor pulleys, cables, and frame.
15. When finished, replace the axis and cable covers.
16. Ensure adequate clearance between the pulley assemblies and side covers.

6-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.10.3 Lubricating the XY Linear Guides

 NOTE Use Linear Bearing PS2 Grease (P/N 199560) grease included in the Grease Kit
(P/N 7212878). Refer to Appendix A - Material Safety Information for the Safety Data
Sheet.
To lubricate the XY linear guides:
1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Refer to 6.10.1 Loading the Grease Gun to load the grease gun.
3. Manually move the dispensing head to the front of the dispensing area.
4. Remove the X-axis and Y-axis covers. See 6.9 Removing and Installing the Axis Covers.

WARNING! Use Personal Protective Equipment when working with cleaning and lubrication
materials. Refer to the applicable SDS. Remove all spills and properly dispose of
contaminated materials.

5. Using an ammonia-based cleaner and a soft cloth, clean and wipe the X- and Y-rails.

 Manually move the dispensing head as necessary to reach all parts of the rails.
6. Locate the grease fitting on each of the three X-beam linear bearing cars and four Y-rail
linear bearing cars (Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10).
7. Attach grease gun to each fitting and pull the grease gun lever one time to squirt grease into
the bearing.
8. Use a soft cloth to clean up any excess grease.
9. Install the X- and Y-axis covers. See 6.9 Removing and Installing the Axis Covers.
10. Power on the coating system.
11. Use the arrow keys to move the dispensing head back and forth in both the X-axis and the Y-
axis.
12. Open the hood and use a soft cloth to remove any excess grease along the rails.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

Figure 6-9 Lubricating the X-Axis Linear Guides

Figure 6-10 Lubricating Y-Axis Linear Guides (rear Y-bearings not shown)

6-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.11 Tensioning the Cables


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

6.11.1 Cable Tension Reminder


To ensure that required maintenance is done on schedule, programmers can set up a tension reminder in
the EXCP Maintenance Configuration. The Maintenance Configuration displays a reminder the next time
production is started after the expiration of the configured time period. The operator can choose to
continue production without running the appropriate maintenance program, but the reminder will continue
to appear each time production is started until the maintenance program is run.
To set the cable tension reminder:
1. Click on Configure > Maintenance Configuration to open the Maintenance Configuration
dialog box (Figure 6-11).
2. Select Cable Tension Reminder from the drop-down list.
3. Select the desired unit.
4. Enter the time period.
5. Click OK.

Figure 6-11 EasyCoat Maintenance Configuration Dialog Box

WARNING! This procedure should only be performed by a trained service technician.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-15


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.11.2 Tensioning the XY Cables


To tension the XY cables:
1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Depressurize the fluid system by turning OFF the applicable reservoir air pressure
switch(es) on the back of the coating system.
3. Open the front hood.
4. Loosen the X-axis and the two (2) Y-axis cable tensioner screws (Figure 6-12).
5. Manually move the Z-head in a circle around the entire length and width of the dispensing
area approximately five (5) times.
6. Stop in the center of the dispensing area.
7. Retighten the cable tensioner screws.

1 2

Figure 6-12A Tensioning the X-Axis Cables Figure 6-12B Tensioning the Y-Axis Cables

Item Description
1 X-Axis Cable Tensioner Screw
2 Y-Axis Cable Tensioner Screw
Figure 6-12 Tensioning the XY Cables

8. Close the front hood.

6-16 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.11.3 Tensioning the Z Cable


To tension the Z cable:
1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Use an M3 hex wrench to loosen, do not remove, the tensioner screw (Figure 6-13).

Item Description
1 Tensioner Screw
Figure 6-13 Tensioning the Z Cable

4. Manually move the dispensing head up and down the full length of the axis. Repeat
three (3) to five (5) times.
5. Tighten the tensioner screw.
6. Close the front hood.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 6-17


SL-940 IOM Manual Maintenance

6.12 Tensioning the Conveyor Chains


To tension the conveyor chains:
1. Open the front hood.
2. Loosen the four (4) mounting screws on the back of the motor bracket (Figure 6-14).
3. Let the weight of the motor set the tension in the chain.
4. Tighten the four (4) mounting screws.

Motor Bracket
Screws

Figure 6-14 Tensioning the Conveyor Chains

5. Close the front hood.

6-18 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


7 Troubleshooting

7.1 Overview
If you have difficulty operating the Select Coat SL-940 Conformal Coating System, use this section to
identify a possible solution to the problem. If you have difficulties not listed in this section, or the
suggested solution does not correct the problem, contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support. This
section covers the following troubleshooting procedures:

• System Power

• Pneumatics

• Conveyor

• Vision System

 NOTE There are no user serviceable parts inside the electrical modules. Refer to the EasyCoat
User Guide or Online Help for assistance with the EasyCoat software.

7.2 Safety First


Operation of the SL-940 Conformal Coating System involves heat, air pressure, electrical power,
mechanical devices, and the use of hazardous materials. It is essential that every person servicing or
operating the coating system fully understands all hazards, risks, and safety precautions. Refer to Section
2 - Safety for additional information.

WARNING! Allow only qualified personnel to perform system troubleshooting. Observe and
follow the safety instructions in this document and all other related
documentation. Failure to do so may cause serious bodily injury to the user or
damage to the equipment.

WARNING! DO NOT hot swap connections when working with electrical and pneumatic
power supplies. Turn the main circuit break off before disconnecting the external
power plug from the facility.

7.3 Record Keeping


The type of procedure performed should be recorded in maintenance records for the coating system.
Dates, part numbers/serial numbers of replaced parts, names of technicians, and other pertinent data
should be recorded.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 7-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Troubleshooting

7.4 Basic System Troubleshooting


7.4.1 System Power
Table 7-1 System Power Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Recovery
Press ON (l) on the front panel. The green button
The ON (l) button has not been
will flash for 60 seconds and then the machine will
pressed.
turn on.
Main power cable Check that the main power cable to an AC power
disconnected. source.
Main power circuit breaker Turn ON the main power circuit breaker at the rear
turned is OFF (0). of the system.
The SL-940 incorporates circuit breakers with a
“push to reset” feature rather than fuses. For
A circuit breaker has been
detailed troubleshooting of power related issues,
tripped.
refer to the power manager block diagram or call
Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
1. Turn all EMO buttons clockwise until they
pop out. The EMO buttons at the front and
EMO button has been rear of the system interrupt power to all power
activated. connections except the laptop computer, light
beacon, and camera.
No power to major system 2. Press ON (l) on the front panel.
components Make sure the hood is closed. The interlock places
the servo control system in a low power state that
is just sufficient to hold the positioner in place for
Interlock circuit is interrupted.
syringe changes. Opening the front hood does not
completely power down the SL-940 and does not
power off the PC.
The spill pan must be in place for proper
ventilation. A spill pan interlock sensor detects
Spill pan not in place.
proper installation. If the spill pan is not in place,
the system will not operate.
Make sure exhaust vent duct is connected to the
Machine Exhaust Ventilation factory exhaust system ductwork according to
not ON. specifications (200 SCFM air at 1 in. water column
static pressure).
Verify the power control cables are properly routed
Power control cable
and connected from the power manager to the
disconnected.
front panel switches.
Button failure. Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
Loose fluid, or electrical
Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
connections; restricted hoses.
Micro-adjust knob is fully Open micro-adjustment to characterized setup
closed. value (value between 1 and 12 marks of turn).
Applicator does not
operate Applicator ON/OFF switch is
Turn Applicator ON/OFF switch to the ON position.
OFF.
Air to applicator is
Reconnect air line from applicator to quick
disconnected or connected to
disconnect on Z-head.
the wrong quick disconnect.
Make sure the hood is closed and the spill pan is in
Safety Interlock fails to
Interlock Activated. place. If the interlock still fails to reset, contact
reset
Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.

7-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Troubleshooting

7.4.2 Pneumatics
Table 7-2 System Pneumatic Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Recovery
System not connected to facility
Connect the main air inlet to a facility air supply.
air supply.
Main air regulator off. Verify main air regulator is set properly.
No air pressure
1. Check reservoir air; secure connections if
Reservoir air regulator off. necessary.
2. Verify reservoir air regulator is set properly.
Remove nozzle and visually verify that it is
Nozzle is clogged. clogged. See the applicable coating applicator
manual for cleaning instructions.
Increase fluid pressure. If equipped with material
Not enough fluid pressure or no
No fluid pressure change over option, verify valves are set to correct
fluid pressure.
reservoir.
Micro-adjust knob is fully Open micro-adjustment to characterized setup
closed. value (value between 1 and 12 marks of turn).
EasyCoat not started. Start EasyCoat.

7.4.3 Conveyor
Table 7-3 Conveyor Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Recovery
1. Turn the EMO button clockwise until it pops
EMO button has been activated. back into position.
Chain will not move 2. Press ON (l) on the operator’s console.
Conveyor Controller
Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
malfunction.
Check main air pressure 551 to 620 kPa (80 to
Stop pins, board pins, or
Air pressure too low. 90 psi) and conveyor air pressure 207 to 276
bar clamps do not work
kPa (30 to 40 psi).
No upstream or
Varies. Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
downstream interface
Part sensor not sensing Sensor is dirty, not active, or Clean part sensor, check sensor I/O, or adjust
when board is present needs to be adjusted. sensor sensitivity.
Board will not index after No SMEMA signal from
Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
dispensing downstream system.
Stop pin not receiving air. Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
Clean sensor.
Board Sensor is dirty, not active
Board will not move to If no improvement, Contact Nordson ASYMTEK
or out of adjustment.
correct position Technical Support.
Conveyor rails too close
Adjust width between conveyor rails.
together.
Use an air gun or dry, clean cloth to remove
Conveyor chain Accumulated debris in chain.
debris from the conveyor chain.
movement is erratic or
unsteady Tighten chain by repositioning conveyor motor
Conveyor chain is loose.
(motor weight provides adequate tension).

Introduction 1-1
SL-940 IOM Manual Troubleshooting

7.4.4 Vision System


Table 7-4 Vision System Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Recovery
No Image Verify camera cable is securely connected to the
Camera not connected
(EasyCoat display connector on the top of the camera.
window is a solid
pink color) Faulty camera cable Replace camera cable.
Close EasyCoat and wait until Device available icon
Camera software did not connect
CorAcq Error on is present in toolbar at lower right corner of screen. If
to camera before EasyCoat was
Startup necessary, right click on device IP error icon and left
started
click on “find devices”.
Verify camera power cable is securely connected to
Camera not connected the connector on the top of the camera and to the
Camera LEDs are accessories/main board in the electronics pan.
OFF Faulty camera cable Replace camera cable.
Make sure that machine is plugged in, power
Machine is not receiving power
manager is on, and green power button is lit.
It may take several minutes for the camera to acquire
Camera LED
Camera not initialized a connection with the laptop. DO NOT attempt to run
Steady Red
EasyCoat or DALSA programs during this time.
1. Shutdown the computer and turn off power to the
machine.
Camera LED Slow
Camera Initialization problem 2. Restart the machine, and then the computer.
Flashing Red
3. If necessary, contact Nordson ASYMTEK
Technical Support.
Camera LED Fast
Camera overheated Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.
Flashing Red
Camera LED Fast Verify ethernet cable is securely connected to the
Ethernet cable disconnected
Flashing Blue camera and computer.
No Image F-Stop is completely closed Restore lighting by turning F-Stop ring.
(EasyCoat display Remove and inspect the camera lens. If necessary,
Lens is blocked by foreign matter
window is dark or replace lens. See 8.9.2 Replacing the Camera Lens.
black) Lens cover is still on Remove lens cover.
Substrate is not within height
Adjust camera bracket and/or focal ring. See
focus limits of the camera or the
6.8 Focusing the Camera.
lens is loose
Remove and inspect the camera lens. If lens is
Lens is damaged or there is
damaged or dirty, contact a service technician. See
Unfocused image foreign matter on the lens
8.9.2 Replacing the Camera Lens.
1.5 mm spacer ring is absent. Locate and return spacer ring. See 8.9.2 Replacing
Spacer ring should be located the Camera Lens.
between camera lens and camera If spacer ring cannot be located, contact service
body technician for part number to order replacement.

Computer power switch OFF (0) Turn ON (I) computer power switch.
No monitor display
Press and release computer power switch to wake up
Computer is asleep
computer.

7-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


8 Parts Replacement
8.1 Overview
This section includes general information for ordering recommended spares and replacement parts for
your Select Coat SL-940 Series Conformal Coating System.
This section contains the following procedures:

• Replacing Components Behind the • Replacing Components Inside the


Front Hood

• Replacing the Camera, Lens, and Laser • Replacing the Electrical/Pneumatic


Pointer Panel and Components

• Replacing the Top Cover and • Replacing the Fluid System Cover and
Components Components

• Replacing Conveyor and Service • Replacing Components Inside the


Station Components Lower Rear

• Replacing Control Panel and • Spare Parts List


Components

WARNING! Parts replacement should only be performed by a trained service technician.


Nordson ASYMTEK assumes no liability for personal injury or property damage
that may occur as a result of spare parts being replaced by a non-certified
technician.

8.2 Safety First


Operation of the SL-940 involves heat, air pressure, electrical power, mechanical devices, and the use of
hazardous materials. It is essential that every person servicing or operating the coating system fully
understands all hazards, risks, and safety precautions. Refer to Section 2 - Safety for additional
information.

WARNING! DO NOT hot swap connections when working with electrical and pneumatic
power supplies. Turn the main circuit breaker off before disconnecting the
external power plug from the facility.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.3 Parts Ordering Information


8.3.1 Placing Your Order
Customers can order spare parts by contacting Nordson ASYMTEK Customer Service. Contact
information is listed in the front of this manual. Spare parts can also be ordered online through our
Internet Web Store. To set up a web store account, send an email to americas.at.cs@nordson.com.
When ordering parts, be prepared to provide the following information:

• Your Company Name • Billing Address

• Shipping Address • Part Number and Description

• Purchase Order Number • Quantity

• Coating System Serial Number • Shipping Instructions and Account


(found on back panel) Number

8.3.2 Shipping Instructions


When ordering parts, specify which carrier you prefer to use and provide your shipping account number.
If no instructions are received, Nordson ASYMTEK will determine the best shipping method and items
will be shipped prepaid with the shipping charge added to the invoice.

8.3.3 Warranty
Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support for any warranty issues pertaining to spare parts. Wear
items and consumables are covered under warranty against manufacturer defect only. Expected lifetimes
for these parts will vary based upon application and use.
Consumable parts are generally considered as parts that are replaced on a frequency of > 1 per calendar
year under expected regular usage. In most cases, these parts are “wetted parts” that make contact with
the dispensed fluid. Wear items are those items that have been identified to have limited life expectancy
(less than 5 years) but are not considered consumables. Wear items are often highly application
dependent, high user-touch, or adjusted parts.

8.4 Credit and Exchanges


Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support for credit or exchanges of recommended spare parts or
refurbished components (components restored to original specifications but not sold as new).

8.4.1 Return Material Authorization


Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) before
returning any parts.

 NOTE Find your local Technical Support contact on the Nordson ASYMTEK web page,
www.nordsonasymtek.com.

8-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.5 Record Keeping


The type of service performed should be recorded in the coating system maintenance records. Dates, part
numbers/serial numbers of replaced parts, names of technicians, and other pertinent data should be
recorded.

8.6 Unpacking and Inspecting Replacement Parts


Replacement parts are shipped to distributor or customer facilities in individual shipping cartons. Review
the packing slip to ensure that the correct parts were received. Contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical
Support if any discrepancies are discovered.
Before unpacking your spare parts, visually inspect the carton for damage. If applicable, check the
ShockWatch and the Tip N’ Tell stickers for indications of improper shipping and handling. Inform the
freight carrier of any damage.

8.7 Cleaning and Inspection


Always clean the area made visible after a failed part is removed from the coating system. Inspect the
area for signs of what may have caused the part to fail. This may help prevent future part damage.
While removing parts that will be reinstalled, visually inspect them for damage. If found undamaged,
retain them for reinstallation. Replace damaged parts and hardware as appropriate.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.8 Replacing Components Behind the Front Hood


The control panel contains the interlock switch and LED light.

8.8.1 Replacing the Interlock Switch

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the interlock switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connection to the interlock switch (Figure 8-1).
4. Remove the two (2) nuts securing the interlock switch to the coating system (Figure 8-1).

Item Description
1 Switch, Interlock, AB “ELF” (P/N 7209906)
2 Nuts (2)
Figure 8-1 Removing the Interlock Switch

5. Remove the interlock switch.

8-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the interlock switch:


1. Install the interlock switch to the coating system with two (2) nuts (Figure 8-2).
2. Connect the electrical connection to the interlock switch (Figure 8-2).

Item Description
1 Switch, Interlock, AB “ELF” (P/N 7209906)
2 Nuts (2)
Figure 8-2 Installing the Interlock Switch

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.8.2 Replacing the LED Light


To remove the LED light:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections to the LED light (Figure 8-3).
4. Remove the LED light from the LED lens clips (Figure 8-3).

1 1

Item Description
1 LED Lens Clips (2)
2 Assy, LED Sys Light, 12V 6” (P/N 7266340)
Figure 8-3 Removing the LED Light (Wiring Removed for Clarity)

8-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the LED light:


1. Install the LED light into the LED lens clips (Figure 8-4).
2. Connect the electrical connections to the LED light (Figure 8-4).
3. Close the front hood.

1 1

Item Description
1 LED Lens Clips (2)
2 Assy, LED Sys Light, 12V 6” (P/N 7266340)
Figure 8-4 Installing the LED Light (Wiring Removed for Clarity)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.9 Replacing the Camera, Lens, and Laser Pointer


8.9.1 Replacing the Camera

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the camera:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Disconnect the ethernet cable and camera power cable from the camera (Figure 8-5).
4. Loosen, do not remove, the two (2) screws securing the camera bracket to the z head
(Figure 8-5).
5. Remove the camera bracket with camera from the z head (Figure 8-5).

Item Description
1 Camera (See 8.17 Spare Parts List for Part Numbers)
2 Screws (2) (P/N 387979)
3 Camera Bracket
Figure 8-5 Removing the Camera

8-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the camera:


1. Align the camera bracket with camera to the screws located on the Z head (Figure 8-6).
2. Tighten the screws securing the camera bracket with camera to the Z head (Figure 8-6).
3. Connect the ethernet cable and camera power cable to the camera (Figure 8-6).

Item Description
1 Camera (See 8.17 Spare Parts List for Part Numbers)
2 Screws (2) (P/N 387979)
3 Camera Bracket
Figure 8-6 Installing the Camera

4. Close the front hood.


5. Proceed to focusing the camera as specified in 6.8 Focusing the Camera.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.9.2 Replacing the Camera Lens

CAUTION! Except for lens replacement and lighting adjustments, all other configuration and
adjustments should only be performed by a trained service technician.

To remove and replace the camera lens:


1. Open the front hood.
2. Remove the lens from the camera by turning the lens tube counterclockwise (Figure 8-7).
3. Screw on the replacement lens to the camera by turning the lens tube clockwise
(Figure 8-7).
4. Proceed to focusing the camera as specified in 6.8 Focusing the Camera.

Item Description
1 Camera (See 8.17 Spare Parts List for Part Numbers)
2 Lens Tube
Figure 8-7 Replacing the Camera Lens

8-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.9.3 Replacing the Optional Laser Pointer

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the laser pointer:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connection from the laser pointer sense cable (Figure 8-8).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the cable clamps to the Z head (Figure 8-8).
5. Remove the two (2) nuts and two (2) lock washers securing the cable clamps and laser
pointer bracket to the Z head (Figure 8-8).
6. Remove the laser pointer bracket with laser pointer from the Z head.

Item Description
1 Assy, Laser, Pointer, 940 (P/N 7219986)
2 Nuts (2) (P/N 7208192)
3 Cable Clamps (4) (P/N 7244930)
4 Screws (2) (P/N 7207192)
5 Laser Pointer Sense Cable
Figure 8-8 Removing the Laser Pointer

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the laser pointer:


1. Install the laser pointer with bracket and the cable clamps to the Z head using two (2) nuts
and two (2) lock washers (Figure 8-9).
2. Torque the two (2) nuts to 25 in-lbs (Figure 8-9).
3. Install the two (2) screws securing the cable clamps to the Z head (Figure 8-9).
4. Torque the two (2) screws to 25 in-lbs (Figure 8-9).
5. Connect the electrical connection to the laser pointer sense cable (Figure 8-9).
6. Close the front hood.

Item Description
1 Assy, Laser, Pointer, 940 (P/N 7219986)
2 Nuts (2) (P/N 7208192)
3 Cable Clamps (4) (P/N 7244930)
4 Screws (2) (P/N 7207192)
5 Laser Pointer Sense Cable
Figure 8-9 Installing the Laser Pointer

8-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10 Replacing the Top Cover and Components


The top cover components include the front, rear, and carriage pulley assemblies.

8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench • Crescent Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the top cover:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the two (2) screws securing the top cover to the coating system (Figure 8-10).
4. Remove the top cover.

Item Description
1 Top Cover
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-10 Removing the Top Cover

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover


To install the top cover:
1. Align the top cover to the alignment holes on the coating system (Figure 8-11).
2. Install the two (2) screws securing the top cover to the coating system (Figure 8-11).
3. Close the front hood.

Item Description
1 Top Cover
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-11 Installing the Top Cover

8-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10.3 Replacing the Front Pulley Assemblies


The following procedure is for both left or right front pully assemblies.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the front pulley assembly:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the top cover as described in 8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover.
4. Remove the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-15


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

5. Remove the four (4) nuts from the front pulley assembly (Figure 8-12).
6. Remove the four (4) screws and four (4) washers securing the front pulley assembly to the
coating system (Figure 8-12).
7. Remove the pulley assembly from the coating system.

1 5

Item Description
1 Nuts (4)
2 Screws (4)
3 Washers (4)
4 Assy, Left Front Pulley (P/N 7209873)
5 Assy, Right Front Pulley (P/N 7209874)
Figure 8-12 Removing the Front Pulley Assembly

8-16 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the front pulley assembly:


1. Install the front pulley assembly to the coating system with four (4) screws and four (4)
washers (Figure 8-13).
2. Install the four (4) nuts onto the front pulley assembly (Figure 8-13).
3. Torque the four (4) nuts to 87 in-lbs (Figure 8-13).

1 5

Item Description
1 Nuts (4)
2 Screws (4)
3 Washers (4)
4 Assy, Left Front Pulley (P/N 7209873)
5 Assy, Right Front Pulley (P/N 7209874)
Figure 8-13 Installing the Front Pulley Assembly

4. Install the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.
5. Install the top cover as described in 8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover.
6. Close the front hood.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-17


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10.4 Replacing the Home Sensor PWA


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the home sensor PWA:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the top cover as described in 8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover.
4. Remove the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2. Y-Axis Cable Cover.
5. The home sensor PWA is located on the left front pulley assembly (Figure 8-14).
6. Remove two (2) screws, two (2) nuts, securing the home sensor PWA from the Y switch
bracket (Figure 8-14).
7. Remove the home sensor PWA from the Y switch bracket (Figure 8-14).

Item Description
1 Y Switch Bracket
2 PWA, Home Sensor (P/N 6105634)
3 Nuts (2)
4 Screws (2)
Figure 8-14 Removing the Home Sensor PWA

8-18 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the home sensor PWA:


1. Install the two (2) screws and two (2) nuts onto the home sensor PWA to the Y switch
bracket (Figure 8-15).
2. Torque two (2) screws to 3.45 in-lbs.
3. Torque two (2) nuts to 87 in-lbs.

Item Description
1 Y Switch Bracket
2 PWA, Home Sensor (P/N 6105634)
3 Nuts (2)
4 Screws (2)
Figure 8-15 Installing the Home Sensor PWA

4. Install the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.
5. Install the top cover as described in 8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover.
6. Close the front hood.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-19


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10.5 Replacing the Rear Pulley Assemblies


The following procedure is for both left or right rear pulley assemblies.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the rear pulley assembly:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the top cover as described in 8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover.
4. Remove the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.

8-20 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

5. Remove the four (4) nuts securing the rear pulley assembly to the coating system
(Figure 8-16).
6. Remove the pulley assembly from the coating system (Figure 8-16).

2 1

1
1
3

Item Description
1 Nuts (4)
2 Assy, Left Rear Pulley (P/N 7209872)
3 Assy, Right Rear Pulley (P/N 7209871)
Figure 8-16 Removing the Rear Pulley Assembly

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-21


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the rear pulley assembly:


1. Install the four (4) nuts securing the rear pulley assembly to the coating system
(Figure 8-17).
2. Torque the four (4) nuts to 87 in-lbs (Figure 8-17).

2 1

1
1
3

Item Description
1 Nuts (4)
2 Assy, Left Rear Pulley (P/N 7209872)
3 Assy, Right Rear Pulley (P/N 7209871)
Figure 8-17 Installing the Rear Pulley Assembly

3. Install the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.
4. Install the top cover as described in 8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover.
5. Close the front hood.

8-22 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10.6 Replacing the Y-Carriage Pulley


The following procedure is for both left or right Y-carriage pulley assemblies.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the Y-carriage pulley:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the top cover as described in 8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover.
4. Remove the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the panel to the X-axis (Figure 8-18).
6. Remove the two (2) screws and (2) washers securing the Y-carriage pulley to the coating
system (Figure 8-18).
7. Remove the Y-carriage pulley (Figure 8-18).

3 2

1
2

Item Description
1 Washers (2)
2 Screws (2)
3 Assy, Y-Carriage Pulley (P/N 7209875)
Figure 8-18 Removing the Y-Carriage Pulley

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-23


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the Y-carriage pulley:


1. Install the two (2) screws and two (2) washers securing the Y-carriage pulley to the coating
system (Figure 8-19).
2. Torque the two (2) screws to 12 in-lbs (Figure 8-19).
3. Install the two (2) screws securing the panel to the X-axis (Figure 8-19).

3 2

1
2

Item Description
1 Washers (2)
2 Screws (2)
3 Assy, Y-Carriage Pulley (P/N 7209875)
Figure 8-19 Installing the Y-Carriage Pulley

4. Install the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.
5. Close the front hood.
6. Install the top cover as described in 8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover.

8-24 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.10.7 Replacing the X-Carriage Pulley


The following procedure is for both left or right X-carriage pulley assemblies.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the X-carriage pulley:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the top cover as described in 8.10.1 Removing the Top Cover.
4. Remove the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2 Y-Axis Cable Cover.
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the X-carriage pulley to X-axis (Figure 8-20).
6. Remove the X-carriage pulley (Figure 8-20).

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 X-Carriage Pulley (P/N 7209876)

Figure 8-20 Removing the X-Carriage Pulley

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-25


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the X carriage pulley:


1. Install the two (2) screws securing the X-carriage pulley to the X-axis (Figure 8-21).
2. Torque the two (2) screws to 87 in-lbs (Figure 8-21).

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 X-Carriage Pulley (P/N 7209876)

Figure 8-21 Installing the X-Carriage Pulley

3. Install the Y-axis cable cover as described in 6.9.2. Y-Axis Cable Cover.
4. Close the front hood.
5. Install the top cover as described in 8.10.2 Installing the Top Cover.

8-26 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.11 Replacing Conveyor and Service Station Components


8.11.1 Replacing Conveyor Chains
Checking the condition of the conveyor chains should be part of the routine maintenance schedule for the
coating system. Worn or broken chains should be replaced immediately.
Tools and Materials Needed:

• Pliers • Phillips Screwdriver

• Allen Wrench • Removable Thread Locker 242 (P/N 392398)

• Isopropyl Alcohol • Roller Chain, #25, NP (P/N 193721)

• Soft Cloth and Cotton Swabs • Master Link, #25 Chain (P/N 193722)

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To replace the conveyor chains:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Move the dispensing head to the rear of the coating system.
4. Use the manual width adjust to move the rear conveyor rail to achieve an approximate
eight-inch space between the front and rear conveyor rails.
5. Create slack in the chain by loosening the four (4) mounting screws on the back of the
motor bracket and moving the bracket up and down until the desired slack is achieved
(Figure 6-14).

Motor Bracket
Screws

Figure 8-22 Creating Slack in the Chain

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-27


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

6. Locate the master link and use the pliers to remove it as described below:
a. Remove the retainer clip (Figure 8-23).
b. Remove the female link (Figure 8-24).
c. Remove the master link (Figure 8-25).

Figure 8-23 Removing the Figure 8-24 Removing the Figure 8-25 Removing the Master
Retainer Clip Female Link Link (Male Link)

7. Remove any rail-mounted components that interfere with chain removal/replacement.


8. Remove the old chain by sliding it off the conveyor sprockets.

TIP It is recommended that you remove and replace one chain at a time to ensure that
all parts removed from each rail are re-installed in their exact same locations.
9. Use isopropyl alcohol and clean swabs to clean all metal surfaces that contact the chain,
including sprockets and rails.
10. Install the new chain onto the sprocket rail (Figure 8-26).

Figure 8-26 Installing the Chain on the Sprocket Rail

8-28 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

11. Bring the two (2) ends of the chain one chain-link length apart (Figure 8-27).
12. Insert master link’s male link into both ends of the chain so that pins are pointing outboard
(Figure 8-27).
13. Attach the master link’s female link to both male link’s pins (Figure 8-28).
14. Slide the retainer clip onto male link’s pins. Ensure that the clip’s open-end points in the
direction of the motor subassembly (Figure 8-29).

Figure 8-27 Inserting the Male Figure 8-28 Attaching the Figure 8-29 Installing the
Link Female Link Retainer Clip

15. Tension the chain by loosening the motor mounting screws allowing the motor’s weight to
remove the slack. See 6.12 Tensioning the Conveyor Chains.

 NOTE Slack should be eliminated with the motor’s weight (do not push the motor
down to create tension on the chain).
16. Perform a visual inspection of chain to ensure that slack from chain is eliminated.
17. Lock motor into position by tightening screws.
18. Perform a function check by revolving the chain two (2) to three (3) times through its
complete range of motion.
19. Replace any rail-mounted equipment that you removed in Step 7.
20. Repeat Step 7 through Step 18 for the remaining chain.
21. Close the front hood.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-29


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.11.2 Replacing the 30 Degree Stop Pin

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench • Cylinder Tester Assembly

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the 30 degree stop pin:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Rotate the conveyor air regulator knob counterclockwise until the conveyor regulator gauge
registers zero (0).
4. Disconnect the pneumatic connections from the 30 degree stop pin (Figure 8-30).
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the 30 degree stop pin to the conveyor rail
(Figure 8-30).
6. Retain in place the two (2) square nuts located in the conveyor rail (Figure 8-30).
7. Remove the 30 degree stop pin from the conveyor rail (Figure 8-30).

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Stop Pin, 30 Deg (P/N 198799)
3 Square Nuts (2)
4 Conveyor Rail
Figure 8-30 Removing the 30 Degree Stop Pin

8-30 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the 30 degree stop pin:


1. Install the 30 degree stop pin to the two (2) square nuts with two (2) screws (Figure 8-31).
2. Connect the pneumatic connections to the 30 degree stop pin (Figure 8-31).
3. Close the front hood.

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Stop Pin, 30 Deg (P/N 198799)
3 Square Nuts (2)
4 Conveyor Rail
Figure 8-31 Installing the 30 Degree Stop Pin

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-31


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.11.3 Replacing the Step Motor


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the step motor:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connection from the step motor.
4. Remove the three (3) screws securing the step motor to the rear conveyor bracket
(Figure 8-32).
5. Remove the three (3) screws, three (3) washers, three (3) spacers, step motor, and pulley
from the rear conveyor bracket (Figure 8-32).
2
3

1
4

Item Description
1 Spacers (3)
2 Washers (3)
3 Screws (3)
4 Step Motor, 125 in-oz, 1.8 Deg (P/N 7263550)
5 Pulley
Figure 8-32 Removing the Step Motor (Components Removed for Clarity)

8-32 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the step motor:


1. Install the three (3) screws, three (3) washers, three (3) spacers, step motor, and pulley onto
the rear conveyor bracket (Figure 8-33).
2. Connect the electrical connection to the step motor.
3. Close the front hood.
2
3

1
4

Item Description
1 Spacers (3)
2 Washers (3)
3 Screws (3)
4 Step Motor, 125 in-oz, 1.8 Deg (P/N 7263550)
5 Pulley
Figure 8-33 Installing the Step Motor (Components Removed for Clarity)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-33


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.11.4 Replacing the Sensor Board Assembly

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

To remove the sensor board assembly:


1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
2. Open the front hood.
3. Disconnect the electrical connection from the sensor board assembly (Figure 8-34).
4. Remove one (1) screw securing the sensor board assembly to the conveyor (Figure 8-34).
5. Retain in place one (1) square nut located in the conveyor rail (Figure 8-34).
6. Remove the sensor board assembly with cable from the conveyor rail (Figure 8-34).

1
2

Item Description
1 Screw
2 Assy Sensor Board, 94X w/Bracket (P/N 7256188)
3 Conveyor Rail

Figure 8-34 Removing the Sensor Board Assembly

8-34 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the sensor board assembly:


1. Install the sensor board assembly to the square nut with one (1) screw (Figure 8-35).
2. Connect the electrical connection to the sensor board assembly (Figure 8-35).
3. Close the front hood.

1
2

Item Description
1 Screw
2 Assy Sensor Board, 94X w/Bracket (P/N 7256188)
3 Conveyor Rail
Figure 8-35 Installing the Sensor Board Assembly

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-35


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.11.5 Replacing the Solvent Cup Bracket


This procedure is for both upper and lower solvent cup brackets.

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Phillips Screwdriver
To remove the solvent cup bracket:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.
3. Remove the solvent cup from the solvent cup bracket (Figure 8-36).
4. Remove one (1) screw securing the solvent cup bracket to the conveyor rail (Figure 8-36).
5. Remove the solvent cup bracket (Figure 8-36).

2
3

4
Item Description
1 Bracket, Solvent Cup, Single, Upper (P/N 197461)
2 Solvent Cup (2) (P/N 115810)
3 Screw
4 Bracket, Solvent Cup, Single, Lower (P/N 197462)
Figure 8-36 Removing the Solvent Cup Bracket

8-36 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the solvent cup bracket:


1. Install one (1) screw securing the solvent cup bracket to the conveyor rail (Figure 8-37).
2. Install the solvent cup into the solvent cup bracket (Figure 8-37).
3. Close the front hood.

2
3

4
Item Description
1 Bracket, Solvent Cup, Single, Upper (P/N 197461)
2 Solvent Cup (2) (P/N 115810)
3 Screw
4 Bracket, Solvent Cup, Single, Lower (P/N 197462)
Figure 8-37 Removing the Solvent Cup Bracket

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-37


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.12 Replacing Control Panel and Components


The control panel contains the ON and OFF buttons, and the EMO button.

8.12.1 Removing the Control Panel

Tools and Materials Needed:


• Allen Wrench
To remove the control panel:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front hood.

8-38 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

3. Loosen and do not remove the three (3) screws securing the lower portion of the control
panel to the coating system (Figure 8-38).
4. Remove the three (3) screws securing the upper portion of the control panel to the coating
system (Figure 8-38).

WARNING! Once the control panel has been removed, it will need to be supported as there
are cable connections from the system to the panel. Not supporting the control
panel may cause wiring and cable connector damage.

3
3

Item Description
1 Control Panel
2 Screws (3)
3 Screws (3)
Figure 8-38 Removing the Control Panel (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

5. If necessary, replace failed switches as described in the 8.12.3 Replacing EMO Actuator
Switch, 8.12.4 Replacing the ON Switch, and 8.12.5 Replacing the OFF Switch.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-39


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.12.2 Installing the Control Panel


To install the control panel:

WARNING! Once the control panel has been removed, it will need to be supported as there
are cable connections from the system to the panel. Not supporting the control
panel may cause wiring and cable connector damage.

1. Install the control panel back onto the three (3) screws on the lower portion of the coating
system and tighten the screws (Figure 8-39).
2. Secure the upper portion of the control panel to the coating system with the three (3) screws
(Figure 8-39).
3. Close the front hood of the coating system.

3
3

Item Description
1 Control Panel
2 Screws (3)
3 Screws (3)
Figure 8-39 Installing the Dispensing Station Cover (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

8-40 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.12.3 Replacing EMO Actuator Switch

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Switch Mounting Tool (P/N 7241369)

• Thread Lock-Plastic Adhesive (P/N 7246603)


To remove the EMO actuator switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the control panel as described in 8.12.1 Removing the Control Panel.
3. Disconnect the power control cable from the EMO contact block switch (Figure 8-40).
4. From rear of the control panel using the switch mounting tool, remove the nut securing the
EMO actuator switch (Figure 8-40).
5. Remove the EMO actuator switch from the front of the control panel (Figure 8-40).

2 3 4

Item Description Item Description


1 Control Panel 3 EMO Nut (included with P/N 198870)
2 EMO Actuator Switch (P/N 198870) 4 EMO Contact Block Switch (P/N 198871)
Figure 8-40 Removing the EMO Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-41


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the EMO actuator switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Install the EMO actuator switch through the front of the control panel (Figure 8-41).
2. Apply thread lock-plastic adhesive onto the threads of the EMO nut (Figure 8-41).
3. Install the EMO nut from the rear of the control panel onto the EMO actuator switch
(Figure 8-41).
4. Tighten the EMO nut with the switch mounting tool (Figure 8-41).
5. Connect the EMO switch contact block to the EMO actuator switch (Figure 8-41).

2 3 4

Item Description Item Description


1 Control Panel 3 EMO Nut (included with P/N 198870)
2 EMO Actuator Switch (P/N 198870) 4 EMO Switch Contact Block (P/N 198871)
Figure 8-41 Installing the EMO Actuator Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

6. Reinstall the control panel as described in 8.12.2 Installing the Control Panel.

8-42 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.12.4 Replacing the ON Switch

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Switch Mounting Tool (P/N 7241369)

• Thread Lock-Plastic Adhesive (P/N 7246603)


To remove the ON switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the control panel as described in 8.12.1 Removing the Control Panel.
3. Disconnect the contact block from the momentary actuator (Figure 8-42).
4. From rear of the control panel using the switch mounting tool, remove the metal mounting
nut securing the metal flush mount adapter (Figure 8-42).
5. Remove the metal flush mount adapter from the rear of the control panel and the green LED
switch from the front of the control panel (Figure 8-42).

4
3
2

Item Description Item Description


1 Control Panel 4 Metal Flush Mount Adapter
2 Contact Block 5 Switch, 3P-NO, Green LED (P/N 7204788)
3 Metal Mounting Nut
Figure 8-42 Removing the ON Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-43


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the ON switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Install the green LED switch through the front of the control panel (Figure 8-43).
2. Apply thread lock-plastic adhesive onto the threads of the metal mounting nut
(Figure 8-43).
3. Install the metal flush mount adapter and metal mounting nut from the rear of the control
panel onto the green LED switch (Figure 8-43).
4. Tighten the metal mounting nut utilizing the switch mounting tool (Figure 8-43).
5. Connect the contact block to the momentary actuator (Figure 8-43).

4
3
2

Item Description Item Description


1 Control Panel 4 Metal Flush Mount Adapter
2 Contact Block 5 Switch, 3P-NO, Green LED (P/N 7204788)
3 Metal Mounting Nut
Figure 8-43 Installing the ON Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)
6. Reinstall the control panel as described in 8.12.2 Installing the Control Panel.

8-44 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.12.5 Replacing the OFF Switch

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Switch Mounting Tool (P/N 7241369)

• Thread Lock-Plastic Adhesive (P/N 7246603)


To remove the OFF switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the control panel as described in 8.12.1 Removing the Control Panel.
3. Disconnect the contact block from the momentary actuator (Figure 8-42).
4. From rear of the control panel using the switch mounting tool, remove the metal mounting
nut securing the metal flush mount adapter (Figure 8-42).
5. Remove the metal flush mount adapter from the rear of the control panel and the black
switch from the front of the control panel (Figure 8-42).

Item Description Item Description


1 Contact Block 4 Control Panel
2 Metal Mounting Nut 5 Switch, 2P-NC, Black (P/N 7204789)
3 Metal Flush Mount Adapter
Figure 8-44 Removing the OFF Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-45


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the OFF switch:


1. Install the black switch through the front of the control panel (Figure 8-45).
2. Apply thread lock-plastic adhesive onto the threads of the metal mounting nut
(Figure 8-45).
3. Install the metal flush mount adapter and metal mounting nut from the rear of the control
panel onto the black switch (Figure 8-45).
4. Tighten the metal mounting nut utilizing the switch mounting tool (Figure 8-45).
5. Connect the contact block to the momentary actuator (Figure 8-45).
6. Reinstall the control panel as described in 8.12.2 Installing the Control Panel.

Item Description Item Description


1 Contact Block 4 Control Panel
2 Metal Mounting Nut 5 Switch, 2P-NC, Black (P/N 7204789)
3 Metal Flush Mount Adapter
Figure 8-45 Installing the OFF Switch (Wiring Not Shown for Clarity)

8-46 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.13 Replacing Components Inside the Cabinet


The cabinet contains the regulator panel with the reservoir regulator and reservoir air pressure gauge.

8.13.1 Replacing the Regulator Panel


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the regulator panel:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front cabinet.
3. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator knob counterclockwise until the reservoir air
pressure gauge registers zero (0) (Figure 8-46).
4. Disconnect the pneumatic connections from the reservoir air pressure gauge and reservoir
regulator (Figure 8-46).
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the regulator panel to the coating system (Figure 8-46).
6. Remove the regulator panel from the coating system (Figure 8-46).

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator Knob
3 Panel, Regulator, 940 (P/N 7207852)
Figure 8-46 Removing the Regulator Panel

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-47


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the regulator panel:


1. Secure the regulator panel to the coating system with two (2) screws (Figure 8-47).
2. Connect the pneumatic connections to the reservoir air pressure gauge and reservoir
regulator (Figure 8-47).
3. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator knob clockwise until the reservoir air pressure gauge
registers desired pressure (Figure 8-47).
4. Close the front cabinet.

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator Knob
3 Panel, Regulator, 940 (P/N 7207852)
Figure 8-47 Installing the Regulator Panel

8-48 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.13.2 Replacing the Reservoir Pressure Regulator


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Thread Lock-Plastic Adhesive (P/N 7246603)

• Wrench with Rubber Jaws


To remove the reservoir pressure regulator:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front cabinet.
3. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator knob counterclockwise until the reservoir air
pressure gauge registers zero (0) (Figure 8-48).
4. Disconnect the pneumatic connections from the reservoir pressure regulator (Figure 8-48).
5. Support the reservoir pressure regulator and remove the watt regulator nut from the
reservoir pressure regulator (Figure 8-48).
6. Remove the reservoir pressure regulator from the regulator panel (Figure 8-48).

Description
1 Regulator, 0-60 psi (P/N 7251142)
2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator Knob
3 Regulator Panel
4 Nut, Watt Regulator
Figure 8-48 Removing the Reservoir Regulator

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-49


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the reservoir pressure regulator:


1. Insert the reservoir pressure regulator into the regulator panel (Figure 8-49).
2. Support the reservoir pressure regulator and tighten the reservoir regulator to the regulator
panel with the watt regulator nut using a wrench with rubber jaws (Figure 8-49).
3. Apply two (2) drops of thread lock-plastic adhesive between the watt regulator nut and
regulator panel (Figure 8-49).
4. Connect the pneumatic connections to the reservoir pressure regulator (Figure 8-49).
5. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator knob clockwise until the reservoir pressure regulator
registers desired pressure (Figure 8-49).
6. Close the front cabinet.

Item Description
1 Regulator, 0-60 psi (P/N 7251142)
2 Reservoir Pressure Regulator Knob
3 Regulator Panel
4 Nut, Watt Regulator
Figure 8-49 Installing the Miniature Regulator

8-50 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.13.3 Replacing the Pressure Gauge


Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the pressure gauge:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the front cabinet.
3. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator knob counterclockwise until the reservoir pressure
regulator registers zero (0) (Figure 8-50).
4. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the pressure gauge (Figure 8-50).
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the pressure gauge to the regulator panel
(Figure 8-50).
6. Remove the two (2) screws, bracket, restrictor, and pressure gauge from the regulator panel
(Figure 8-50).
2

4
1

Item Description
1 Reservoir Pressure Regulator Knob
2 Pressure Gauge (P/N 7203947)
3 Restrictor
4 Bracket
5 Screws (2)
Figure 8-50 Removing the Pressure Gauge

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-51


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the pressure gauge:


1. Install the pressure gauge through the regulator panel (Figure 8-51).
2. Install the restrictor onto the pressure gauge (Figure 8-51).
3. Install the bracket over the pressure gauge (Figure 8-51).
4. Install the two (2) screws securing the pressure gauge to the regulator panel (Figure 8-51).
5. Connect the pneumatic connection to the pressure gauge (Figure 8-51).
6. Rotate the reservoir pressure regulator knob clockwise until the reservoir pressure regulator
registers desired pressure (Figure 8-51).
7. Close the front cabinet.
2

4
1

Item Description
1 Reservoir Pressure Regulator Knob
2 Pressure Gauge (P/N 7203947)
3 Restrictor
4 Bracket
5 Screws (2)
Figure 8-51 Removing the Pressure Gauge

8-52 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14 Replacing the Electrical/Pneumatic Panel and


Components
The electrical/pneumatic panel contains switches, valves, servos, PWAs, regulator, gauge, and the rear
EMO.

8.14.1 Removing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the electronic/pneumatic panel:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the five (5) screws securing the electronic/pneumatic panel to the coating system
(Figure 8-52).
3. Remove electronic/pneumatic panel (Figure 8-52).

Item Description
1 Screws (5)
2 Electronic/Pneumatic Panel

Figure 8-52 Removing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-53


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.2 Installing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel


To install the electronic/pneumatic panel:
1. Install the five (5) screws securing the electronic/pneumatic panel to the coating system
(Figure 8-53).

Item Description
1 Screws (5)
2 Electronic/Pneumatic Panel
Figure 8-53 Installing the Electronic/Pneumatic Panel

8-54 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.3 Replacing the Vent Switch Assembly

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the vent switch assembly:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the cable connection from the vent switch assembly (Figure 8-54).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the vent switch assembly to the coating system
(Figure 8-54).
5. Remove the vent switch assembly from the coating system (Figure 8-54).

Item Description
1 Vent Switch Assembly (P/N 7215968)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-54 Removing the Vent Switch Assembly

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-55


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the vent switch assembly:


1. Install the vent switch assembly with two (2) screws to the coating system
(Figure 8-55).
2. Connect the cable connection from the vent switch assembly (Figure 8-55).

Item Description
1 Vent Switch Assembly (P/N 7215968)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-55 Installing the Vent Switch Assembly

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-56 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.4 Replacing the 3-Way Valve Assembly

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the 3-way valve assembly:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connections to the 3-way valve assembly (Figure 8-56).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the 3-way valve assembly to the coating system
(Figure 8-56).
5. Remove the 3-way valve assembly from the coating system (Figure 8-56).

Item Description
1 Assy, Valve 3-Way W/Fittings (P/N 7210792)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-56 Removing the 3-Way Valve Assembly

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-57


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the 3-way valve assembly:


1. Install the 3-way valve assembly with two (2) screws to the coating system
(Figure 8-57).
2. Connect the pneumatic connections to the 3-way valve assembly (Figure 8-57).

Item Description
1 Assy, Valve 3-Way W/Fittings (P/N 7210792)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-57 Installing the 3-Way Valve Assembly

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-58 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.5 Replacing a Servo Amp PWA

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove a servo amp PWA:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections on the servo amp PWA (Figure 8-58).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the servo amp PWA to the coating system
(Figure 8-58).
5. Remove the servo amp PWA from the coating system (Figure 8-58).

Item Description
1 PWA, Servo Amp (3) (P/N 7232320)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-58 Removing the Servo Amp PWA

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-59


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the servo amp PWA:


1. Install the servo amp PWA with two (2) screws to the coating system (Figure 8-59).
2. Connect the electrical connections to the servo amp PWA (Figure 8-59).

Item Description
1 PWA, Servo Amp (3) (P/N 7232320)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-59 Installing the Servo Amp PWA

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-60 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.6 Replacing the Servo Power Control PWA

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the servo power control PWA:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections on the servo power control PWA (Figure 8-60).
4. Remove the four (4) screws securing the servo power control PWA to the coating system
(Figure 8-60).
5. Remove the servo power control PWA from the coating system (Figure 8-60).

Item Description
1 Screws (4)
2 PWA, Servo Power Control (P/N 7214000)
Figure 8-60 Removing the Servo Power Control PWA

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-61


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the servo power control PWA:


1. Install the servo power control PWA with four (4) screws to the coating system
(Figure 8-61).
2. Connect the electrical connections to the servo power control PWA (Figure 8-61).

Item Description
1 Screws (4)
2 PWA, Servo Power Control (P/N 7214000)
Figure 8-61 Installing the Servo Power Control PWA

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-62 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.7 Replacing the 3-Way High Flow Valve

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the 3-way high flow valve:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic and electrical connections on the 3-way high flow valve
(Figure 8-62).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the 3-way high flow valve to the coating system
(Figure 8-62).
5. Remove the 3-way high flow valve from the coating system (Figure 8-62).
1

Item Description
1 Screws (4)
2 Valve, 3-Way, High Flow (P/N 383240)
Figure 8-62 Removing the 3-Way High Flow Valve

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-63


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the 3-way high flow valve:


1. Install the 3-way high flow valve with two (2) screws to the coating system
(Figure 8-63).
2. Connect the pneumatic and electrical connections to the 3-way high flow valve
(Figure 8-63).

Item Description
1 Screws (4)
2 Valve, 3-Way, High Flow (P/N 383240)
Figure 8-63 Installing the 3-Way High Flow Valve

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-64 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.8 Replacing the SL-940 Main PWA

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the SL-940 main PWA:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. If required, proceed to 8.14.9 Replacing the Main PWA Fuse to replace the SL-940 main
PWA 5a fuse.
4. Disconnect the electrical connections on the SL-940 main PWA (Figure 8-64).
5. Remove the nine (9) screws securing the SL-940 main PWA to the coating system
(Figure 8-64).
6. Remove the SL-940 main PWA from the coating system (Figure 8-64).

1
2

Item Description
1 Screws (9)
2 PWA, SL-94X Main (P/N 7291635)
Figure 8-64 Removing the SL-940 Main PWA

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-65


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the SL-940 main PWA:


1. Install the SL-940 main PWA with nine (9) screws to the coating system (Figure 8-65).
2. Connect the electrical connections to the SL-940 main PWA (Figure 8-65).

1
2

Item Description
1 Screws (9)
2 PWA, SL-94X Main (P/N 7291635)
Figure 8-65 Installing the SL-940 Main PWA

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-66 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.9 Replacing the Main PWA Fuse


This circuit board fuse is mounted in a holder on the SL-940 main PWA. The fuse protects the SL-940
main PWA from damage caused by electrical overloads from +24 V supplied circuits.
Tools and Materials Needed:

• ESD Grounding Strap • 5A 125V 280MIL Fuses (P/N 7204226)


• Small Flat Head Screwdriver • Allen Wrench

CAUTION! Always replace fuses with fuses of identical rating and size. Failure to do so may
not protect components from damage.

To remove and replace the main PWA fuse:

WARNING! This procedure should be performed by a trained service technician only.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Locate the SL-940 main PWA, if necessary, refer to the SL-940 Electrical Diagram
(P/N 7208942BD). See Appendix B - Block Diagrams for a list of applicable block diagrams
(Figure 8-66).

Item Description
1 Main PWA (P/N 7291635)
Figure 8-66 Rear Cabinet (Electrical and Pneumatic Connections Removed for Clarity)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-67


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

CAUTION! The circuit board and its components are susceptible to damage by Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD). Observe all ESD protection protocols while performing this
procedure.

4. Remove the 5A fuse from the SL-940 main PWA (Figure 8-67).
5. Trim the leads and bend the leads on the replacement 5A fuse in the same orientation as the
old 5A fuse (Figure 8-67).
6. Properly dispose of the replaced 5A fuse (Figure 8-67).
7. Install the 5A fuse into the fuse holder located on the SL-940 main PWA (Figure 8-67).

Item Description
1 5A 125V 280MIL Fuse (P/N 7204226)
Figure 8-67 Main PWA Fuse Location

8. Power on the coating system as described in 4.3 Powering on the Coating System.
9. Verify that the LEDs on the SL-940 main PWA board are now lit.
10. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
11. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
12. Power on the coating system as described in 4.3 Powering on the Coating System.

8-68 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.10 Replacing the Accessories PWA

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the accessories PWA:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections on the accessories PWA (Figure 8-68).
4. Remove the nine (9) screws securing the accessories PWA to the coating system
(Figure 8-68).
5. Remove the accessories PWA from the coating system (Figure 8-68).

Item Description
1 Screws (9)
2 PWA, Accessories, 940 (P/N 7208938)
Figure 8-68 Removing the Accessories 940 PWA

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-69


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the accessories PWA:


1. Install the accessories PWA with nine (9) screws to the coating system (Figure 8-69).
2. Connect the electrical connections to the accessories PWA (Figure 8-69).

Item Description
1 Screws (9)
2 PWA, Accessories, 940 (P/N 7208938)
Figure 8-69 Installing the Accessories 940 PWA

3. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-70 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.11 Replacing the Universal Power Supply

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the universal power supply:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Remove the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover.
4. Disconnect the electrical connections on the universal power supply (Figure 8-70).
5. Loosen, do not remove, the two (2) screws that secures the universal power supply to the
coating system (Figure 8-70).
6. Slide out and remove the universal power supply from the coating system (Figure 8-70).

Item Description
1 Power Supply, Univ VAC to 24 VDC 100W (P/N 7200148)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-70 Removing the Universal Power Supply

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-71


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the universal power supply:


1. Install the universal power supply onto the coating system by aligning the screws to the
holes in the coating system panel and slide forward (Figure 8-71).
2. Tighten the two (2) screws that secures the universal power supply to the coating system
(Figure 8-71).
3. Connect the electrical connections to the universal power supply (Figure 8-71).

Item Description
1 Power Supply, Univ VAC to 24 VDC 100W (P/N 7200148)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-71 Installing the Universal Power Supply

8-72 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.12 Replacing the Conveyor, Tilt and Spare Pressure Regulators

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Crescent Wrench
To remove the conveyor, tilt and spare pressure regulators:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connections on the regulator (Figure 8-72).
4. Remove the nut securing the regulator to the coating system (Figure 8-72).
5. Remove the nut, washer, and regulator from the coating system (Figure 8-72).

Item Description
1 Nut
2 Washer
3 Regulator, 100 PSI, 1/4 NPT (P/N 7200339)
Figure 8-72 Removing the Regulator

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-73


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the conveyor, tilt and spare pressure regulators:


1. Install the regulator from underneath through the hole marked CONV. PRESS., or TILT
PRESS., or SPARE PRESS. (Figure 8-73).
2. Install the washer and nut and tighten lock nut securing the regulator to the coating system
(Figure 8-73).
3. Connect the pneumatic connections to the regulator (Figure 8-73).

Item Description
1 Nut
2 Washer
3 Regulator, 100 PSI, 1/4 NPT (P/N 7200339)
Figure 8-73 Installing the Regulator

4. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-74 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.13 Replacing the Conveyor Pressure Gauge

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the conveyor pressure gauge:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Rotate the conveyor air regulator knob counterclockwise until the conveyor pressure gauge
registers zero (0) (Figure 8-74).
4. Disconnect the pneumatic connection on the conveyor pressure gauge (Figure 8-74).
5. Remove the two (2) screws securing the conveyor pressure gauge to the coating system
(Figure 8-74).
6. Remove the bracket and conveyor pressure gauge from the coating system (Figure 8-74).

1 4

Item Description
1 Conveyor Air Regulator Knob
2 Conveyor Pressure Gauge (P/N 7203947)
3 Bracket
4 Screws (2)
Figure 8-74 Removing the Conveyor Pressure Gauge

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-75


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the conveyor pressure gauge:


1. Install the conveyor pressure gauge through the panel of the coating system (Figure 8-75).
2. Install the bracket over the conveyor pressure gauge (Figure 8-75).
3. Install the two (2) screws securing the conveyor pressure gauge to the coating system
(Figure 8-75).
4. Connect the pneumatic connection on the conveyor pressure gauge (Figure 8-75).
5. Rotate the main air regulator knob clockwise until the main air regulator registers desired
pressure.
6. Rotate the conveyor air regulator knob clockwise until the conveyor pressure gauge
registers desired pressure (Figure 8-75).

1 4

Item Description
1 Conveyor Air Regulator Knob
2 Conveyor Pressure Gauge (P/N 7203947)
3 Bracket
4 Screws (2)
Figure 8-75 Installing the Conveyor Pressure Gauge

7. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-76 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.14 Replacing EMO Actuator Switch

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Panel Mount Tool (P/N 6113938)

• Thread Lock-Plastic Adhesive (P/N 7246603)


To remove the EMO actuator switch:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the power control cable from the EMO contact block switch (Figure 8-76).
4. From rear of the coating system using the panel mount tool, remove the nut securing the
EMO actuator switch (Figure 8-76).
5. Remove the EMO actuator switch from the coating system (Figure 8-76).

Item Description
1 Switch, EMO Contact Block (P/N 198871)
2 Switch, EMO Actuator (P/N 198870)
3 Metal Nut
Figure 8-76 Removing the EMO Actuator Switch

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-77


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the EMO actuator switch:


1. Install the EMO actuator switch through the coating system (Figure 8-77).
2. Apply thread lock-plastic adhesive onto the threads of the EMO nut (Figure 8-77).
3. Install the EMO nut from the rear of the control panel onto the EMO actuator switch
(Figure 8-77).
4. Tighten the EMO nut with the panel mount tool (Figure 8-77).
5. Connect the EMO switch contact block to the EMO actuator switch (Figure 8-77).

Item Description
1 Switch, EMO Contact Block (P/N 198871)
2 Switch, EMO Actuator (P/N 198870)
3 Metal Nut
Figure 8-77 Installing the EMO Actuator Switch

6. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-78 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.15 Replacing the XY Drive

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the XY drive:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.1 Removing the
Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections from the XY drive (Figure 8-78).
4. Support the XY drive and remove the two (2) screws located on the left side of the rear
cover attaching to the XY drive (Figure 8-78).

3
2

Item Description
1 Rear Cover
2 Screws (2)
3 XY Drive (P/N 7241338)
Figure 8-78 Removing the Rear Cover (1)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-79


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

5. Support the XY drive and remove the two (2) screws securing the rear cover to the coating
system (Figure 8-79).

Item Description
1 Rear Cover
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-79 Removing the Rear Cover (2)

8-80 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

6. Support the XY drive and remove the rear cover (Figure 8-80).
7. Support the XY drive and remove the two (2) screws located on the right side of the rear
cover attaching to the XY drive (Figure 8-80).

1 2

Item Description
1 XY Drive (P/N 7241338)
2 Rear Cover
3 Screws (2)
Figure 8-80 Removing the XY Drive (1)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-81


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8. Support the XY drive and remove the four (4) screws located at the rear of XY drive
(Figure 8-81).
9. Remove the XY drive from the coating system (Figure 8-81).

Item Description
1 XY Drive (P/N 7241338)
2 Screws (4)
Figure 8-81 Removing the XY Drive (2)

8-82 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the XY drive:


1. Support the XY drive an install the four (4) screws located at the rear of the XY drive to the
coating system (Figure 8-82).

Item Description
1 XY Drive (P/N 7241338)
2 Screws (4)
Figure 8-82 Installing the XY Drive (1)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-83


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

2. Support the XY drive and install the two (2) screws located on the right side of the rear
cover attaching to the XY drive (Figure 8-83).

1 2

Item Description
1 XY Drive (P/N 7241338)
2 Rear Cover
3 Screws (2)
Figure 8-83 Installing the XY Drive (2)

8-84 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

3. Support the XY drive and install the left side of the rear cover with two (2) screws
(Figure 8-84).

Item Description
1 Rear Cover
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-84 Installing the Rear Cover (1)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-85


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

4. Support the XY drive and install the two (2) screws located on the left side of the rear cover
attaching to the XY drive (Figure 8-85).
5. Connect the electrical connections to the XY drive (Figure 8-85).

3
2

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Rear Cover
3 XY Drive (P/N 7241338)
Figure 8-85 Installing the Rear Cover (2)

6. Reinstall the electronic/pneumatic panel as described in 8.14.2 Installing the


Electronic/Pneumatic Panel.

8-86 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.14.16 Replacing the Main Air Regulator

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Thread Lock-Plastic Adhesive (P/N 7246603)

• Wrench with Rubber Jaws


To remove the main air regulator:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Rotate the main air regulator knob counterclockwise until the main air regulator registers
zero (0) (Figure 8-86).
3. Disconnect the main air pressure hose from the main air regulator (Figure 8-86).
4. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the main air regulator (Figure 8-86).
5. Support the main air regulator and remove the watt regulator nut from the main air regulator
(Figure 8-86).
6. Remove the main air regulator from the regulator panel (Figure 8-86).

Item Description
1 Nut, Watt Regulator
2 Panel, Regulator, 940
3 Main Air Regulator (P/N 7203947)
Figure 8-86 Removing the Main Air Regulator

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-87


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the main air regulator:


1. Support the main air regulator and insert the main air regulator into the regulator panel
(Figure 8-87).
2. Support the main air regulator and tighten the main air regulator to the regulator panel with
the watt regulator nut using a wrench with rubber jaws (Figure 8-87).
3. Apply two (2) drops of thread lock-plastic adhesive between the watt regulator nut and
bracket (Figure 8-87).
4. Connect the pneumatic connection to the main air regulator (Figure 8-87).
5. Connect the main air pressure hose to the main air regulator (Figure 8-87).
6. Rotate the main air regulator knob clockwise until the main air regulator registers desired
pressure (Figure 8-87).

Item Description
1 Nut, Watt Regulator
2 Panel, Regulator, 940
3 Main Air Regulator (P/N 7203947)
Figure 8-87 Installing the Main Air Gauge

8-88 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.15 Replacing the Fluid System Cover and Components


8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover
To remove the fluid system cover:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the fluid system cover by turning the four (4) quick release screws
counterclockwise (Figure 8-88).
3. Remove the fluid system cover from the coating system (Figure 8-88).

Item Description
1 Screw (4)
2 Fluid System Cover
Figure 8-88 Removing the Fluid System Cover

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-89


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.15.2 Installing the Fluid System Cover


To install the fluid system cover:
1. Install the fluid system cover by turning the four (4) quick release screws clockwise
(Figure 8-89).

Item Description
1 Screw (4)
2 Fluid System Cover
Figure 8-89 Installing the Fluid System Cover

8-90 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.15.3 Replacing the Heater Assembly

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the heater assembly:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover.
3. If required, proceed to 8.15.4 Replacing the Heater Assembly Fuse to replace the 4a fuse.
4. Disconnect the pneumatic and electrical connections from the heater assembly
(Figure 8-90).
5. Remove the four (4) screws securing the heater assembly to the coating system
(Figure 8-90).
6. Remove the heater assembly (Figure 8-90).

Item Description
1 Screw (4)
2 Heater, NH-4, 500W (P/N 7210788)
Figure 8-90 Removing the Heater Assembly

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-91


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the heater assembly:


1. Install the heater assembly to the coating system with four (4) screws (Figure 8-91).
2. Connect the pneumatic and electrical connections to the heater assembly (Figure 8-91).

Item Description
1 Screw (4)
2 Heater, NH-4, 500W (P/N 7210788)
Figure 8-91 Installing the Heater Assembly

3. Reinstall the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.2 Installing the Fluid System Cover.

8-92 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.15.4 Replacing the Heater Assembly Fuse

Tools and Materials Needed:

• ESD Grounding Strap • 4A 5X20MM, Time Lag Fuse (P/N 7242639)


• Flat Head Screwdriver

CAUTION! Always replace fuses with fuses of identical rating and size. Failure to do so may
not protect components from damage.

To remove and replace the heater fuse:

WARNING! Fuse replacement should be performed by a trained service technician only.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the fluid systems cover as described in 8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover.
3. With a flat head screwdriver, gently push in and turn the fuse holder counterclockwise until
the head of the fuse holder pops out enough to allow you to grasp the 4A fuse
(Figure 8-92).
4. Pull the fuse holder out of its socket (Figure 8-92).
5. Properly dispose of the replaced 4A fuse.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-93


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

6. Insert the new 4A fuse into the fuse holder (Figure 8-92).
7. With a flat head screwdriver, simultaneously push and twist the fuse holder clockwise into
the socket until the fuse holder locks into place (Figure 8-92).

Item Description
1 Heater, NH-4, 500W (P/N 7210788)
2 4A 5X20MM, Time Lag Fuse (P/N 7242639)
3 Fuse Holder

Figure 8-92 Removing and Replacing the Heater Fuse

8. Power on the coating system as described in 4.3 Powering on the Coating System.

8-94 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.15.5 Replacing the Fluid Filter

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the fluid filter:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Remove the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connections from the fluid filter (Figure 8-93).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the fluid filter to the coating system (Figure 8-93).
5. Remove the fluid filter (Figure 8-93).

Item Description
1 Fluid Filter, S-940 (P/N 7211534)
2 Screw (2)
Figure 8-93 Removing the Fluid Filter

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-95


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the fluid filter:


1. Install the fluid filter to the coating system with two (2) screws (Figure 8-94).
2. Connect the pneumatic connections to the fluid filter (Figure 8-94).

Item Description
1 Screw (2)
2 Fluid Filter, S-940 (P/N 7211534)
Figure 8-94 Installing the Fluid Filter

3. Reinstall the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.2 Installing the Fluid System Cover.

8-96 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.15.6 Replacing the Diaphram Pump

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the diaphram pump:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Prior to removing the diaphram pump for replacement, ensure the following has been
completed:
a. Reset the reset switch located on the bottom of the diaphram pump.
b. Restart the coating system and verify if diaphram pump is operational.
1) If the diaphram pump is operational, the diaphram pump does not need to be
replaced.
2) If the diaphram pump does not work proceed to Step 2.
2. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.
3. Remove the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.1 Removing the Fluid System Cover.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-97


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

4. Disconnect the pneumatic and electrical connections from the diaphragm pump
(Figure 8-95).
5. Remove the grounding wire from the coating system (Figure 8-95).
6. Remove the two (2) screws securing the diaphram pump to the coating system
(Figure 8-95).
7. Remove the diaphram pump from the coating system (Figure 8-95).

Item Description
1 Assy, Pump, Diaph, SST, STD (P/N 6126208)
2 Grounding Wire
3 Screws (2)
Figure 8-95 Removing the Diaphram Pump

8-98 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the diaphram pump:


1. Align the tab on the diaphram pump bracket to the opening in the coating system
(Figure 8-96).

Item Description
1 Opening in Coating System
2 Tab on Diaphram Pump Bracket
Figure 8-96 Tab Alignment

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-99


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

2. Secure the diaphram pump to the coating system with two (2) screws (Figure 8-97).
3. Connect the grounding wire from the diaphram pump to the coating system
(Figure 8-97).
4. Connect the pneumatic and electrical connections to the diaphram pump (Figure 8-97).

Item Description
1 Assy, Pump, Diaph, SST, STD (P/N 6126208)
2 Grounding Wire
3 Screws (2)
Figure 8-97 Installing the Diaphram Pump

5. Reinstall the fluid system cover as described in 8.15.2 Installing the Fluid System Cover.

8-100 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.16 Replacing Components Inside the Lower Rear Cabinet


8.16.1 Replacing the Power Manager

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the power manager:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the lower rear cabinet.
3. Remove the four (4) screws securing the power manager shield to the coating system
(Figure 8-98).

Item Description
1 Screws (4)
2 Power Manager Shield
Figure 8-98 Removing the Power Manager Shield

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-101


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

4. Disconnect the grounding wire from the coating system (Figure 8-99).
5. Disconnect all electrical connections to the power manager (Figure 8-99).
6. Remove the two (2) screws securing the power manager to the coating system
(Figure 8-99).
7. Remove the power manager (Figure 8-99).

1 3

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Assy, 10A Power Manager (P/N 7284840)
3 Grounding Wire
Figure 8-99 Removing the Power Manager

8-102 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the power manager:


1. Install the power manager with two (2) screws to the coating system (Figure 8-100).
2. Connect the grounding wire to the coating system (Figure 8-100).
3. Connect all electrical connections to the power manager (Figure 8-100).

1 3

Item Description
1 Screws (2)
2 Assy, 10A Power Manager (P/N 7284840)
3 Grounding Wire
Figure 8-100 Installing the Power Manager

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-103


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

4. Install the power manager shield with four (4) screws to the coating system
(Figure 8-101).
5. Close the lower rear cabinet.

Item Description
1 Screws (4)
2 Power Manager Shield
Figure 8-101 Installing the Power Manager Shield

8-104 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.16.2 Replacing the Power Supply

Tools and Materials Needed:

• Allen Wrench
To remove the power supply:

WARNING! Ensure the coating system has been completely shut down before attempting to
remove any panel.

1. Perform a service shutdown as specified in 4.18.4 Service Shutdown.


2. Open the lower rear cabinet.
3. Disconnect all electrical connections to the power supply (Figure 8-102).
4. Remove the two (2) screws securing the power supply to the coating system (Figure 8-102).
5. Remove the power supply (Figure 8-102).

Item Description
1 Power Supply, 600W, 48VDC, Switch (P/N 7209471)
2 Screws (2)

Figure 8-102 Removing the Power Supply

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-105


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

To install the power supply:


1. Secure the power supply to the coating system with two (2) screws (Figure 8-103).
2. Connect the electrical connections to the power supply (Figure 8-103).
3. Close the lower rear cabinet.

Item Description
1 Power Supply, 600W, 48VDC, Switch (P/N 7209471)
2 Screws (2)
Figure 8-103 Installing the Power Supply

8-106 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

8.17 Spare Parts List


Table 8-1 contains a list of spare parts that will aid in ordering replacements parts for the SL-940
Conformal Coating System.
 NOTE Parts listed in Table 8-1 are those in effect at the time of manual publication. Part number
information is also available on Nordson ASYMTEK’s Internet Web Store:
www.nordsonasymtek.com Support > Webstore
Table 8-1 Spare Parts List
Part
Service Level Description Comments
Number
Components Accessed Behind the Front Hood (Section 8.8)
7204797 SWITCH, INTERLOCK, AB “ELF”
Level 4 - Insurance Items 7266340 ASSY, LED SYS LIGHT, 12V, 6”
Individually, OPT, UV LED,
94X, P/N 7268200.
7229376 BRACKET, GAS SPRINGS, S-9XX Package Qty (2)
Camera and Laser Pointer (Section 8.9)
This camera P/N is for
replacement. If upgrading
7209895 CAMERA, GIGA-E, NO SW LICENSE to have vision, order
camera with license, P/N
7218141.

Level 4 - Insurance Items 7218141 KIT, GIGA-E CAMERA & S/W LICENSE Includes software license.
Includes camera lens,
7217570 ASSY, CAMERA, PROGRAMMING, 940 extension, and bracket.
Includes camera lens,
7216280 CAM, PATTERN REC, 8” FOCAL DIST extension, and bracket
7219986 ASSY, LASER POINTER,940 Optional
Components Accessed Behind the Top Cover (Section 8.10)
Level 3 - Wear Items 7211500 CABLE, 38.0 FT MECH. GRADE 1
7209871 ASSY, RIGHT REAR PULLEY
7209872 ASSY, LEFT REAR PULLEY
7209873 ASSY, LEFT FRONT PULLEY
Level 4 - Insurance Items 7209874 ASSY, RIGHT FRONT PULLEY
7209875 ASSY, Y CARRIAGE PULLEY
7209876 CM X-CARRIAGE PULLEY
6105634 PWA, HOME SENSOR
Conveyor and Service Station Components (Section 8.11)
OBS, ROLLER CHAIN, #25, NP, 312
193721
Level 2 - Maintenance Items LINK
193722 MASTER LINK, #25 CHAIN
Level 3 - Wear Items 7207835 CHAIN, #25, 340 LINK, 85” LONG Package Qty (2)
7263550 STEP MOTOR, 125 IN-OZ, 1.8 DEG
7209444 BELT TIMING, 3M PITCH, 600 GRV
115810 SOLVENT CUP Package Qty (2)
197461 BRACKET, SOLVENT CUP UPPER
197462 BRACKET, SOLVENT CUP LOWER
Level 4 - Insurance Items
7256188 ASSY, SNSR BD, 94X W/BRACKET
198799 STOP PIN, 30 DEG
7268200 OPT, UV LED, 94X Complete Kit
7284826 OPT, SL-940 BOARD PINS Complete Kit
7216283 OPT, NEEDLE SENSOR, 940 Complete Kit

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-107


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

Part
Service Level Description Comments
Number
Components Accessed Behind the Control Panel (Section 8.12)
Level 2 - Maintenance items 6113937 TOOL, SM, SW. PANEL MT
198870 SWITCH, EMO ACTUATOR EMO Actuator - Front
198871 SWITCH, EMO CONTACT BLOCK
SWITCH, 3P-NO, MOM, 24V
Level 4 - Insurance Items 7204788 ON Button
LED,GREEN
7204789 SWITCH, 2P-NC, MOM, BLACK FLUSH OFF Button
7209416 SNAP, ESD FEMALE
Components Accessed Behind the Front Cabinet (Section 8.13)
Reservior Pressure
7251142 REGULATOR, MINIATURE , 0-60 PSI Regulator
7203947 GAUGE, PRESSURE
Level 4 - Insurance Items 7296113 USB HUB AND POWER Complete Assembly
7296111 HUB, USB, 2.0, 7 PORT SUNRICH Part of P/N 7296113
7296110 ADAPTER, USB TO ETHERNET Part of P/N 7296113
7288894 POWER SUPPLY, LENOVO E460 Part of P/N 7296113
Components Accessed Behind the Electrical / Pneumatics Panel (Section 8.14)
Level 1 - Wear Items 7242639 FUSE, 4A, 5X20MM, TIME LAG
6113938 TOOL, LG, SW. PANEL, MT
7246603 ADHESIVE, THREAD LOCK -PLASTIC
198870 SWITCH, EMO ACTUATOR EMO Actuator - Rear
198871 SWITCH, EMO CONTACT BLOCK
7203947 GAUGE, 0-100 PSI/KPA Conveyor Pressure Gauge
Conveyor, Tilt and Spare
7200339 REGULATOR, MINI, 100 PSI, 1/4 NPT Pressure Regulators
7215968 ASSY, VENT SWITCH, .15-55” W.C.
7210792 ASSY, VALVE, 3 WAY W/FITTINGS
7232320 PWA, SERVO AMP
Level 4 - Insurance Items
7214000 PWA, SERVO POWER CONTROL
383240 VALVE, 3 WAY, HIGH FLOW
7291635 PWA, SL-94X MAIN
7208938 PWA, ACCESSORIES, 940
7218860 PWA, ACCESSORIES, 940 CORE Core System Only
7241338 XY DRIVE
383240 VALVE, 3 WAY, HIGH FLOW
7209437 MAIN AIR REGULATOR
BEACON, 60MM RAGB & ALARM
7263560
W/CONN
Components Accessed Behind the Fluid System Cover Components (Section 8.15)
Level 1 - Wear Items 7242639 FUSE, 4A, 5X20MM, TIME LAG
7210788 HEATER, NH-4, 500W
Level 4 - Insurance Items 7211534 FLUID FILTER, S-940
6126208 ASSY, PUMP, DIAPH, SST, STD
Components Accessed Behind the Lower Rear Cabinet (Section 8.16)
POWER SUPPLY, 600W, 48VDC,
7209471
Level 4 - Insurance Items SWITCH
7284840 ASSY, 10A POWER MANAGER

8-108 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Parts Replacement

Part
Service Level Description Comments
Number
Computer Components
Order if converting from
E460 to E470. If customer
6112632 FRU KIT, S-9xx LAPTOP, E470 has E470, order
P/N 6112634.
Order if converting from
E460 to E470. If customer
Level 4 - Insurance Items 6112631 FRU KIT, S-9xx LAPTOP, E470 has E470, order
P/N 7296826.
If converting from E460 to
6112634 ASSY, S-9xx, E470, W7 E470, order P/N 6112632.
If converting from E460 to
7296826 ASSY, SL-94x, E470, EC6, W7 E470, order P/N 6112631.
Z-Head Component
Level 4 - Insurance Items 381793 ASSY, PULLEY TIRE
Grease Kit (P/N 7212878)
382827 BOX, 11 X 6.5 X 2 W/ CHERRY LOCKS
392455 PUMP, NSK GREASE
392456 NOZZLE, 3 MM NSK GREASE
Level 2 - Maintenance Items
198773 GREASE, MOLY-GRAPH, 3 OZ, TUBE
199560 PS2 GREASE, NSK LINEAR BEARING
7282236 WIPER, 10ct LINT FREE DURX 570
SL-940 Tool Kit (P/N 7214630)
159755 WRENCH, 1/4 IN COMBINATION
196674 WRENCH, OPEN END, 1 1/2"
387487 HEX KEY WRENCH, 3/32”
7257503 WRENCH, 3/4 X 13/16 OPEN END
Level 2 - Maintenance Items 7242187 SCREWDRIVER, PHILLIPS #2
7242188 TOOL ROLL, 10 POCKET VINYL
382677 SCREWDRIVER-A010 W/LOGO
382986 FITT’G, 1/4 FNPT COUPLER, FEM
392435 ASSY, NEEDLE X-Y LOCATOR

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 8-109


9 Specifications
9.1 Overview
The Select Coat SL-940 Conformal Coating System facility requirements and specifications are listed in
Table 9-1 through Table 9-3. These specifications are intended as a convenient reference for installation,
system relocation, planning and operation. Meeting the requirements will ensure reliable operation and
safety of the coating system.

WARNING! To ensure optimal performance and safety, it is necessary to install the coating
system in a facility that meets the requirements listed in Table 9-1. If you have
any questions, please contact Nordson ASYMTEK Technical Support.

9.2 Facility Requirements


Table 9-1 Facility Requirements
Facility Requirements
1000 mm width x 1329 mm depth (39.3 x 52.3 in.)
Computer keyboard/monitor occupy additional 527 mm (20.7 in.) in the front
System Footprint Lower door requires 855 mm (33.7 in.) clearance to open in the front
1000 mm clearance in the rear is recommended
See 9.5 System Dimensions for dimensional diagrams
Main Power Supply 200-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 A
Short Circuit Current Rating
10 KA
(SCCR)
Facility Circuit Requirement 30 A
Air Supply 620 kPa (90 psi. 6.2 Bar), up to 0.34 m3/min (12 SCFM)
Minimum Ventilation Rate 0.094m3/s (200 SCFM @ 1.0 in water column); 152.4 mm (6.0 in) duct
410 kPa (60 psi, 4.1 Bar) @ 0.014 m3/min (0.5 SCFM); required for
Nitrogen Supply
moisture-sensitive materials only
Ambient Air Temperature 5-40 °C
Relative Humidity < 90% non-condensing
Altitude Up to 1000 meters
Idle: 320 W
Energy Consumption Peak: (heater not included) 456 W
Peak: (single heater included) 1000 W
Current Consumption 6 A max (with single heater)
Idle: 1.0 SCFM
Air Consumption Avg: 1.1 SCFM
Max: 3.0 SCFM
System Noise <76 dB(A) peak, <71 dB(A) average
System Weight 426 Kg (940 lb. max)
Standards Compliance SMEMA, CE, SEMI, NFPA 79, EN ISO 13849-1, Category 3

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 9-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Specifications

9.3 Declaration of Conformity


The machine described below complies with the appropriate basic safety and health requirements of the
listed directives based on its design and type, as delivered by Nordson ASYMTEK. In case of alteration
of the machine, this declaration may lose its validity.
Manufacturer’s Name: Nordson ASYMTEK
Manufacturer’s Address: 2747 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92010-6603 USA
Authorized Representative in the EU: “Technical Manager Europe” is authorized to compile technical file.
Authorized Representative Address Nordson B.V.
in the EU: Beukelsdijk 2
5753 PA Deurne, Netherlands
Machine/Machine Part Description: General Industrial Machinery
Type of Equipment: Automated Conformal Coating System
Product Series Name: Select Coat® Series SL-940
Model Number:
Serial Number:
Year of Manufacture:

Applicable EU Directives:
2006/42/EC Machinery Directive and all applicable amendments.
2014/30/EU EMC Directive and all applicable amendments.

Applicable Harmonized Standards:


EN 60204-1:2006/AC:2010 Safety of Machinery Electrical Equipment of Machines Part 1: General
Requirements
EN ISO12100:2010 Safety of Machinery General Principles for Design Risk Assessment and
Risk Reduction
EN 61000-6-2:2005/AC:2005 Electromagnetic Compatibility-Immunity for Industrial Environments
EN 61000-6-4:2007/AC:2011 Electromagnetic Compatibility-Emission Standard for Industrial
Environments

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directives
and Standards.

Signature: Date:
(Name) Vice President, Nordson ASYMTEK

Place of Issue: Carlsbad, CA, USA

9-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Specifications

9.4 Specifications
Table 9-2 Specifications
Specifications
Dispensing Area (Single Valve) (1)

Without Camera: 500 x 440 mm (19.7 x 17.3 in)


With Camera: 421 x 440 mm (16.6 x 17.3 in)
Motion System
Type: Closed-loop Servo Motors
X-Y Velocity: 1000 mm/s (39.4 in/s) maximum
X-Y Acceleration: 1g peak with S-curves
Z Axis Velocity: 250 mm/s (10 in/s)
X-Y Repeatability: ±0.025 mm (0.001 in), 3 sigma
Z-Axis Repeatability: ±0.025 mm (0.001 in), 3 sigma
X-Y Resolution: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in), 3 sigma
Z-Axis Resolution: 0.025 mm (0.001 in), 3 sigma
Positional Accuracy: ±0.075 mm (0.003 in), 3 sigma
Conveyor
In-line: Standard chain conveyor with queue stop and pinning set
Manual width adjustment: 25 to 475 mm (1 to 18.7 in)
Maximum Clearance: 100 mm (4 in) above and below PCB
Maximum Pallet/PCB Weight: 5 kg (11 lbs)
Windows Based Laptop Computer with Dual Core
processor
Computer
DVD-ROM/CD-RW Drive
ASCII Keyboard and Touchpad
User Environment: Easy Coat for Windows
Software
Operating System: Microsoft Windows
SC-10XHS High Speed Film Coater
SC-20XHS High Speed Non-Circulating Film Coater
Fluid Delivery Method SC-300/SC-350 Swirl Coat Applicator
SC-400 Precise Coat Conformal Coating Jet
Ionizing and Non-ionizing Radiation N/A
Contaminants N/A
Residual Risks of Materials Used to
None
Construct Equipment

(1) Note: Dual-toggle applicators reduce the total dispense area. Contact factory for specifics.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 9-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Specifications

9.5 System Dimensions

Figure 9-1 System Dimensions (Front View)

9-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Specifications

Figure 9-2 System Dimensions (Side View)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 9-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Specifications

Figure 9-3 System Dimensions (Top View - Hood Open)

 NOTE 1000 mm clearance in the rear is recommended.

9-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Specifications

9.6 Stability Analysis


Table 9-3 Stability Analysis
Specifications
Center of Gravity  See Facilities Drawing P/N 7218847
Weight Distribution (1)

Front Left 94 Kg (207.5 lb)


Front Right 94 Kg (207.5 lb)
Rear Right 119 Kg (261.5 lb)
Rear Left 119 Kg (261.5 lb)
Seismic Loading
Left to Right Stability Anchorage Force 106 Kg (234 lb)
Front to Back Stability Anchorage Force 95 Kg (10 lb)
Tilt Angle (1)
Left 27°
Right 27°
Forward 34°
Backward 28°
(1)
User facing front of the unit.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 9-7


Appendix A Material Safety Information

A.1 Overview
This appendix contains Material Safety Information for the materials contained in the Nordson
ASYMTEK Grease Kit (P/N 7212878).

A.2 Safety Data Sheets


This section contains the following Safety Data Sheets:

• Multemp PS NO 2 (P/N 199560)

• Moly-Graph Extreme Pressure Multi-Purpose Grease (P/N 198773)

WARNING! Consult the Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for all fluids used with the dispensing
system. The SDS provides material usage instructions, disposal instructions, and
safety precautions.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A.2.1 Multemp PS NO 2

A-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A-6 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-7


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A.2.2 Moly-Graph Extreme Pressure Multi-Purpose Grease

A-8 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-9


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A-10 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-11


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A-12 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

© 2019 Nordson Corporation A-13


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix A - Material Safety Information

A-14 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


Appendix B Block Diagrams

B.1 Overview
This section describes dispensing system electronic connections that may help in understanding
dispensing system operation and aid in troubleshooting. Table B-1 lists available pneumatic and electrical
block diagrams.

B.2 Safety First


Use of engineering drawings to disassemble, service, and reassemble the dispensing system promotes
good safety practices only when used in conjunction with the precautions in the Section 2 - Safety and
other sections of this manual.

WARNING! Only trained service technicians should perform troubleshooting, servicing, and
parts replacement.

B.3 List of Pneumatic and Electrical Diagrams


Laminated 11" x 17" versions of diagrams referenced in Table B-1 are included with the dispensing
system.

Table B-1 Block Diagrams


Drawing Number Title
7208942BD Electrical Diagram, Select Coat Series SL-940
7208943PD Pneumatic Diagram, Select Coat Series SL-940

Additional diagrams available include:

Drawing Number Title


7209611BD Electrical Diagram, 30 A CM POWER MANAGER

© 2019 Nordson Corporation B-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix B - Block Diagrams

B.4 Power Manager Connections

1
2

4
5

6
7

9
10

11
12

13
14
16 15
17
18 19

20

21

Figure B-1 Power Manager Connections (10A Power Manager shown)

© 2019 Nordson Corporation B-2


SL-940 IOM Manual Appendix B - Block Diagrams

Table B-2 10A Power Manager Connections


Item Name Description
1 AC1-AC2 Breaker Reset Resets the AC1-AC2 circuit breakers
2 AC1 Unswitched Supplies AC power to the computer
3 AC2 Unswitched Spare unswitched DC outlet
4 AC3 EMO Switched Supplies AC power to the servo power supply
5 AC4 EMO Switched Spare
6 AC5 EMO Switched Spare
7 AC6 EMO Switched Spare
8 AC8 EMO Switched Supplies power to the optional conveyor module CV2
9 AC7 EMO Switched Supplies power to the conveyor module CV1
10 AC8 Breaker Reset Resets the AC8 circuit breaker
11 AC7 Breaker Reset Resets the AC7 circuit breaker
12 AC3-AC6 Breaker Reset Resets the AC3-AC6 circuit breakers
13 Power Controls Connects to the Start, Stop, and EMO power controls
14 DC Power Status Provides machine power status to the main PWA electronics
15 DC Outlet A Provides power to the scale
16 +24 VDC Switched Supplies DC power to the terminal block located on the lower e-pan
17 +24 VDC Switched Spare switched DC outlet
18 Rear EMO Connects to the rear EMO switch
Protective Earth Connects the machine’s chassis to the power manager’s protective
19
Connection earth
Access panel for configuration switches that change between "Time
20 Time Delay Config
Delay" and "Instant On" power up characteristic
21 Vent Air Switch Connects to the vent air switch (bypassed in default configuration)

B-3 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


GGlossary
AC: Alternating Current. Circuit: A combination of electrical or electronic
components, interconnected to perform one or more
Bar Code Recognition System: The Bar Code specific functions.
Recognition System uses a bar code label mounted on
the workpiece to select a coating sequence. Cleaning Agent: A solvent or other cleaning liquid
recommended by the dispensing fluid manufacturer’s
Base Frame: All positioning in the workcell is done Safety Data Sheet.
with reference to sets of position coordinates, called
Reference Frames. In EasyCoat, the Base Frame is the Coating Applicators: Conformal Coating fluid
set of coordinates (X, Y, and Z) that define the robot's applicator. Supported applicators include the
travel. See also Product Frame, Pattern Frame, and SC-104HS, SC-105HS, SC-204HS, SC-205HS, SC-
Reference Frames. 300/SC-350, and SC-400 Fluid Dispensing Applicators.
The SC-100 Series Film Coaters are recirculating
Board Pinning Assembly - Features a board pinning applicators. The SC-200 Series applicators are
sensor and locates the board in terms of X/Y location noncirculating. Noncirculating fluid applicators are used
and rotation. to apply materials that do not require heating and
therefore, are not circulated.
Board Present Sensor: Registers the presence or
absence of a workpiece prior to dispensing. It initiates Coating Area: Area where the coating operations take
the coating sequence only when a workpiece is in place. place.
Brush Box: The Brush Box mounts to the Conveyor Conformal Coating: A material that is applied to a
and is used to clean the dispensing nozzle. circuit board to provide protection from chemical and
mechanical damage.
Carrier Height: The height that the carrier holds the
workpiece above the Conveyor or Tooling Plate. Curing Process: The second step in the Conformal
Coating process. After a coating material has been
Carrier: A device such as an Auer Boat or Lead Frame applied, it must be cured (hardened).
onto which workpieces are mounted and carried during
the dispensing process. Current: The flow of electrons through an electrical
circuit. Usually measured in amperes.
CE: The abbreviation of the French phrase "Conformité
Européene" which literally means "European DC: Direct Current.
Conformity.” CE qualification indicates that a
manufacturer's electric/electronic equipment product Die: See Chip.
complies with European Union health, safety, and
environmental protection Product Directives Dispensing Area: See Coating Area.
(standards). CE qualification means that the product can
be legally sold and freely transported within European Dispensing Head: The robotic coating applicator that
Union markets. moves during the dispensing operation. The coating
applicator is mounted on the Dispensing Head. Also
Characterization: The process of selecting the referred to as the Z-Head or Robot.
appropriate responses to compensate for variables in the
Conformal Coating process. The variables include Dispensing Runs (Wet/Dry): A wet dispensing run is
factors such as material type, temperature, thickness, air when fluid is dispensed. A dry run is when the program
pressure, fluid applicator velocity, and type of surface to is executed but no fluid is dispensed.
be coated.
Dual Simultaneous Mounting Bracket: Doubles
Chip: Also called a die. A small piece of dispensing capability by accommodating two identical
semiconducting material (usually silicon) that contains a applicators side by side for simultaneous dispensing of a
discrete component or an embedded integrated circuit. single fluid.

Circuit Breaker: An automatic switch that Dual Toggle Mounting Bracket: Accommodates dual
automatically cuts the electrical supply to the system Fluid Applicators. Typically uses an SC-105, SC-200, or
when the power current exceeds the set level. Some SC-205 Film Coater plus a needle type Dispensing
circuit breakers can be manually operated to turn power Valve (such as a Nordson ASYMTEK’s DV-Series
off and on for servicing or maintenance purposes. valve) to separately coat broad areas of the board and
areas requiring smaller amounts of coating material.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation G-1


SL-940 IOM Manual Glossary

Gauge: Either an analog or digital device used to


EasyCoat: Nordson ASYMTEK proprietary software measure internal pressure of fluid or air in a closed
for use in a Windows environment, developed system.
specifically for Conformal Coating applications.
Genie Camera: The Dalsa-Coreco Genie M640 camera
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): Discharge of a static displays a live image of the board and is generally used
charge on a person’s body that travels through a for programming purposes. It communicates bi-
conductive path to ground. An electronic component directionally to a host computer via Gigabit Ethernet.
may suffer irreparable damage when it is exposed to the No frame grabber is required.
static charge. The sudden transfer of static electricity
from one object to another. Graphic Card: Computer card that outputs the video
signal to the Monitor.
Emergency Shutdown: The coating system is
intentionally stopped suddenly before ending the Grounding Strap: A strap worn on the wrist of an
program or without using Pause Button to prevent injury operator and plugged into the front panel to prevent
to personnel or damage to equipment. Shutdown is Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) that may cause damage to
accomplished by pushing the EMO button or switching the workpiece.
off the Main Circuit Breaker.
Home: The home position of the Robot is a known
EMO: Emergency Machine Off button on the front position within the workspace defined by X, Y, and Z
panel of the coating system. Cuts power to the coating coordinates. It is generally located at the front left of the
system but does not turn off power to the Power Workcell.
Manager, Computer, or Monitor. Part of the Integrated
Safety System. Hour Meter: Monitors the coating system operation
hours for maintenance logging.
End of Shift: When the Operator ends dispensing for
the day and turns off the coating system. Humidified Conveyor Module: Nordson ASYMTEK’s
Humidified Conveyor module offers accelerated curing
ESD: Electrostatic Discharge. for moisture cure materials.

E-STOP: See EMO. I/O: Input/Output. Communication between one


component or device and another.
Exhaust Vent Duct: The Exhaust Vent Duct is
connected to the facility exhaust system ductwork and Icons: Small buttons on a Computer screen with a
removes fumes from the coating system. symbol representing the function that they perform.
Used to execute a menu shortcut.
Fixture: Fixture is defined as the location inside the
work area used as a consistent and repeatable point for Infrared Heat: Curing method that uses infrared or a
positioning and queuing the product that will be coated. convection oven to cure (harden) coating materials.

Flexible IR/Convection Module: Nordson Inline Inverter Module: Inverts the workpiece so that
ASYMTEK's inline forced-convection cure module both sides may be coated. Provides for a “true” inline
features a flexible design ideal for mid- to high-volume process by virtually eliminating manual handling of the
production. Coating materials are cured using infrared workpiece.
heat.
Interlock Door Sensors: The Interlock Door Sensors
Flow Monitoring System: The Flow Monitoring detect the hood status (open or closed).
System monitors the volume of material dispensed. The
coating system can be programmed to stop, pause, or Interlock Shutdown: When an interlock shutdown
continue when the dispensed volume falls outside the occurs, the motor power turns OFF, the system loses
preset range. master references, and the red beacon light illuminates.
The program WILL NOT resume from where it stopped.
Fluid Filter: The Fluid Filter blocks small particles in
the conformal coating fluid from passing to the Fluid kPa: Kilo Pascals. Metric unit of pressure measurement.
Dispensing Applicator.
Laser Fan Width Control System: Laser Fan Width
Fluid Reservoir: The fluid reservoir contains conformal Control provides closed-loop monitoring of the
coating fluid or solvent. It is available in 1-gallon and 5- conformal coating process. The system automatically
gallon capacities. verifies and adjusts the fan width prior to and/or after
the coating operation. Fan width programming is done
Fuse: A safety device that is designed to automatically through the EasyCoat software.
cut off the flow of electricity when the flow of current
through the fuse exceeds its rated capacity.

G-2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Glossary

Laser Pointer Programming Tool: Projects a red dot Moisture (RTV) Cure: Cures (hardens) coating
onto the workpiece, which simulates the center point of materials using ambient conditions or a humidity-
the dispensing module for faster identification of controlled environment.
program begin and end points.
Monofilament Mode: Conformal coating applied in a
LED: Light-Emitting-Diode. A semiconductor that looping pattern. Available with the SC-200 Slim Swirl
emits light. The materials used in the diode determine Applicator and Tri-Mode Swirl Box.
the color of light. Functions as a system status indicator
and as an element in the Camera light source. OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer.

Levelers: Four adjustable pedestals (feet) on the bottom Operation: Functions, such as setting and manipulating
of the coating system. coating system controls, by which the operator causes
the equipment to perform its intended purpose.
Light Beacon: A safety device with colored lights and
an audible alarm that is attached to the top of a coating Operator Interface: The machine/operator interface
system. Colored lights and an audible alarm indicate that consists of Control Panels, Monitor, software, and
machine status. keyboard and mouse.

Low Air Pressure Sensor: If the air pressure drops Operator: A non-technical level position. The
below a set point, this sensor alerts the operator of production operator monitors and operates pre-
pressure drop conditions. programmed coating systems during production runs
and performs minor routine maintenance.
Low Fluid Scale: The Low Fluid Scale detects a low
fluid condition by weighing the fluid reservoir. If the Outputs: Electrical signals to control devices that must
weight drops below a preset value, a sensor triggers the turn ON and OFF on command.
Light Beacon display and the software issues a warning
message. The sensor can be set to a level that provides Pattern Frame: The origin coordinates of patterns in
ample time to refill the reservoir before reaching an out- EasyCoat, other than the Main Pattern, are expressed as
of-material condition. The Low Fluid Scale is used for a set of coordinates in the Product Frame. The pattern
fluids where direct contact with the sensor is not origin coordinates are stored in the Pattern Edit Frame
feasible. when the pattern is created. See also Product Frame,
Base Frame, and Reference Frames.
Low Fluid Sensor: The Low Fluid Sensor triggers a
Light Beacon display and software warning message PCB: Printed Circuit Board. The completed PWB with
when the level of coating material is low. The sensor electrical components installed. Also known as a Printed
can be set to a level that provides ample time to refill the Wiring Assembly (PWA).
reservoir before reaching an out-of-material condition.
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Clothing and
The Low Fluid Sensor is located within the external
Equipment worn to reduce the risk of personal injury
reservoir and is used for fluids that allow direct sensor
from hazards associated with operation, maintenance,
immersion.
and servicing of the coating system. This includes the
Low Solvent Cup Sensor: The Low Solvent Cup wearing of rubber gloves and safety glasses.
Sensor triggers a light beacon display and software
Pixels: Abbreviation for “Picture Element”. A pixel is a
warning message when the level of solvent in the cup is
single dot in a graphic image. The Computer Monitor
low. The software timer can be set to a level that
displays pictures by dividing the display screen into
provides ample time to refill the cup before reaching an
thousands (or millions) of pixels, arranged in closely
out-of-solvent condition.
spaced rows and columns. A pixel usually consists of
Main Air Inlet: The Main Air Inlet connects the color and brightness information.
coating system to your facility air supply.
Pneumatic Devices: Air pressure actuated devices such
Main Power Inlet: The Main Power Inlet connects the as Stop Pins and Board Pins.
Main Power cable from the facility power source to the
Port: A hardware interface on a computer to which you
coating system.
can connect a device. Any machine connection that
Maintenance: Planned or unplanned activities intended allows for the exchange of electrical communication
to keep the coating system in good working order. signals. An opening in a mechanical device such as the
vacuum port in a contact heater or the conveyor port on
Material Change Over System: Allows you to switch the Coating system.
air and fluid lines between two reservoirs and the fluid
system without physically disconnecting fittings and Power Manager Module: The Power Manager Module
hoses. controls both AC and DC power supplied to all system
components.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation G-3


SL-940 IOM Manual Glossary

Process Engineer: A technical level position. The SC-105HS High Speed Film Coater: Nordson
Process Engineer designs and develops processes for ASYMTEK's 5-axis circulating fluid applicator, with a
automated electronic packaging using production line 0-360° rotate mechanism plus tilt, which applies
equipment. conformal coating in a film rather than an atomized
spray.
Product Frame: Product frames exist within the Base
Frame. EasyCoat uses fixture constraint coordinates, SC-204HS High Speed Non-Circulating Film Coater:
plus the length and width of the product, to calculate the Nordson ASYMTEK 4-axis non-circulating fluid
coordinates of the Product Frame within the Base applicator, with a 0-90° rotate mechanism, that applies
Frame. The Product Frame origin is the calculated Main conformal coating in a film rather than an atomized
Pattern Edit Frame. See also Base Frame, Pattern spray.
Frame, and Reference Frames.
SC-205 Non-Circulating Film Coater: Nordson
Production Shutdown: When all dispensing has been ASYMTEK 5-axis non-circulating fluid applicator, with
stopped under non-emergency conditions such as the a 0-360° rotate mechanism plus tilt that applies
end of a shift. conformal coating in a film rather than an atomized
spray.
Psi: Pressure measured in Pounds Per per Square Inch
(lbs/in2). English unit of pressure measurement. SC-300/350 Swirl Coat Applicator: The SC-300 Swirl
Coat applicator offers three modes of operation; bead,
PWA: Printed Wiring Assembly. The completed PWB monofilament and swirl. Ideal for conformal coating
with electrical components installed. Also known as a applications, the SC-300 handles a wide range of
Printed Circuit Board (PCB). materials, varying in viscosity from 30 to 3500 mPa-sec
(30 to 3500 centipoise). The SC-300 is designed for use
PWB: Printed Wiring Board. An insulating board with solvent-less coatings, supporting environmentally
containing conductive tracks for electrical circuit responsible practices. A four-position tilt option is
connections on which chips and other electronic available to allow coating access to vertical sides of
components are placed. components.
Reference Frames: All positioning in the workcell is SC-400 PreciseCoat Conformal Coating Jet: A non-
done with reference to sets of position coordinates, contact coating applicator ideal for applying conformal
called Reference Frames. In EasyCoat, three different coating materials to highly selective areas. This solution
sets of Reference Frames are used: Base Frame, Product is designed for coating small substrates or substrates
Frame, and Pattern Frame. with high component density, and when there are tight
Regulator: Device for controlling the amount of air tolerances between coated and uncoated areas. The
pressure supplied to a pneumatic system. SC-400 jet reaches locations not accessible by other
applicators, using a needle design with jetting action and
Reservoir Air Pressure Switch: Three-position switch fast pulse-width modulated control.
that toggles the air supplied to Reservoir A, Reservoir
B, or neither. SCFM: Standard Cubic Feet per Minute. A unit of flow
of a liquid or gas.
Robot: Dispensing Head.
Select Cure UV-5 Cure Module: Nordson
Safe Z Height: This is the height below which the tool ASYMTEK's Select Cure inline UV oven with modular
tip cannot go when moving from one set of coordinates design, ideal for curing topside, bottom-side or both
to another during operation. sides of PCBs in a mid- to high-volume production
environment. Coating materials are cured using ultra-
Safety Data Sheet (SDS): Information sheet for the safe violet light.
usage of a specific material. It is provided by the
material manufacturer and is usually included in the Select Cure UV-6 Cure Module: Nordson
fluid material packaging. ASYMTEK's Select Cure inline UV oven with modular
design, ideal for topside curing in a mid- to high-volume
Safety Interlock System: An interlock sensor detects if production environment. Coating materials are cured
the dispensing area hood is open or closed. If the using ultra-violet light.
dispensing area hood is opened when a program is
running, all dispensing motion stops to protect the SEMI: Semiconductor Equipment and Materials
operator from injury. A second interlock sensor is International. An organization that defines protocols for
located behind the spill pan to ensure an appropriate the semiconductor industry.
ventilation path when the drawer is pulled out for
maintenance. Service Shutdown: When all dispensing is stopped, and
the coating system is made safe so that servicing can be
performed.

G-4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Glossary

Service Technician: Trained personnel responsible for Workpiece: The board or substrate (PCB, PWA, etc.) or
performing advanced system servicing procedures. a carrier (pallet, auer boat, lead frame, etc.) to be
dispensed upon.
SMEMA: Surface Mount Equipment Manufacturers
Association. Established protocol for signal X-Axis: Left to right movement of the Dispensing Head
communication between two or more different systems. in the dispensing area (Workcell).

Stop Pin: The Stop Pin is a pneumatic device used to X-Beam: The apparatus that spans the width of the
stop workpieces as they are conveyed into the system. dispensing chamber. The Dispensing Head is mounted
to the X-Beam and slides along it in the X-Axis.
SVGA: Super Video Graphics Array. A video card that Includes mechanical pulleys for the X-Axis cables.
produces high-quality color images at high resolution.
Y-Axis: Forward and backward movement of the
TFT: Thin Film Transistor. The Monitor component Dispensing Head in the dispensing area (Workcell).
that provides color images for a liquid crystal display.
Z-Axis: Up and down movement of the Dispensing
Tool Offset: The tool offset is the X, Y, and Z distance Head in the dispensing area (Workcell).
from the robot's lower tooling pin to the tool tip (the end
of the nozzle). Robot position is calculated using the
coordinates of the tooling pin plus the offset.

Tool: A tool generally consists of a coating applicator


and nozzle. It may also be a teach camera, or a laser
pointer for programming.

Tooling Rails: The adjustable tooling rails secure the


workpiece for batch system operation.

Upstream/Downstream SMEMA Sensors: Mounted


on a bracket attached to the conveyor rail, upstream and
downstream SMEMA sensors allow you to manually
load and unload workpieces onto the conveyor in the
absence of upstream or downstream systems.

UV-Cure: Curing method that uses ultra-violet light to


cure (harden) coating materials.

UV Light: The UV Light is used to view fluids that


contain UV tracers.

V: Abbreviation for volt as in VAC (Volts Alternating


Current). See also AC, DC.

Valve: See Coating Applicators.

Viscosity: Viscosity is a measurement of the flow


properties of a fluid. The ability of a fluid to resist
deformation under stress. High viscosity fluids have a
high resistance to flow, and low viscosity fluids have a
low resistance.

Viscosity Control System: The Viscosity Control


System maintains consistent temperature of conformal
coating fluids. The system includes a coating applicator
and a heated circulating fluid circuit to eliminate
viscosity changes in temperature-responsive materials.

Water Trap: Moisture from the outside air can


condense in the pneumatic system. The Water Trap
collects this condensed moisture. The Water Trap must
be emptied when it’s full.

Workcell: Dispensing area.

© 2019 Nordson Corporation G-5


SL-940 IOM Manual Index

I Index
installation .................................................................. 3-9
Configuration
A bar code/datamatrix scanner ..................................... 5-30
Adjustable Tooling Rails ......................................... 1-5, 1-6 camera configuration ........................................... 5-4–5-7
Air Assist Pressure Regulator and Gauge ..................... 4-19 conveyor .......................................................... 5-21–5-22
Air Pressure fan width................................................................... 5-25
adjusting conveyor air pressure ................................ 4-21 fixture .............................................................. 5-18–5-20
adjusting main air pressure....................................... 4-17 inverter ..................................................................... 5-23
adjusting reservoir air pressure ................................ 4-18 needle finder ............................................................. 5-29
monitoring ................................................................ 4-22 pointer selection ......................................................... 5-2
Applicator ON/OFF Button .......................................... 1-10 setup sequence ............................................................ 5-2
teach relative xy................................................. 5-8–5-10
tool configuration .............................................. 5-3–5-17
B Connecting the Power and Air Supply .......................... 3-11
Bar Code/Data Matrix Reader ........................................ 1-3 Control Panel................................................................... 4-9
Bar Code/DataMatrix Scanner Configuration ............... 5-30 Conveyor
Bar Codes ..................................................................... 5-30 chain replacement ..................................................... 8-27
wildcard characters .................................................. 5-30 configuration ................................................... 5-21–5-22
tensioning chains ...................................................... 6-18
Board Pins .................................................................... 1-12
troubleshooting ........................................................... 7-3
Board Present Sensor ...................................................... 1-3
Conveyor Air Regulator and Gauge .............................. 4-21
Board Sensor................................................................. 1-12
Custom Buttons ............................................................... 4-9
Brush Box ....................................................................... 1-3

C D
Daily Routine Procedures.............................................. 4-23
Cables
Declaration of Conformity .............................................. 9-2
tension reminder....................................................... 6-15
Decommissioning ............................................................ 2-5
tensioning the XY cables ......................................... 6-16
Diagrams
tensioning Z cable .................................................... 6-17
electrical .................................................................... B-1
Calibrate Rotate/Tilt ............................................ 5-14–5-15
pneumatic .................................................................. B-1
Camera
Dispensing Head .................................................. See Robot
configuration ....................................................... 5-4–5-7
Disposal........................................................................... 2-5
connections .............................................................. 3-10
Dual Toggle Mounting Bracket ....................................... 1-4
states .......................................................................... 4-3
Dual-Simultaneous Mounting Bracket ............................ 1-4
Characterization ................................................... 4-28–4-34
Characterization Sheet .................................................. 4-29
Circulating Heated Fluid System .................................. 1-16 E
Coating Applicators ...................................................... 1-11
SC-104/105HS ........................................................... 1-7 EasyCoat
SC-204/205HS ........................................................... 1-7 characterization ............................................... 4-28–4-34
installation ................................................................ 3-13
Coating Area ................................................................... 1-9
operator screen .................................................. 4-4–4-14
Coating System
running a program .................................................... 4-37
anchoring ................................................................. 3-10
starting ........................................................................ 4-4
configuration and characterization ............................. 5-1
Edit Screen .................................................................... 4-15
Declaration of Conformity ......................................... 9-2
opening ..................................................................... 4-15
dispensing area ........................................................... 1-9
running a program .................................................... 4-39
facility requirements .................................................. 9-1
running an individual pattern or procedure ............... 4-39
front panel ................................................................ 1-10
stepping through a program ...................................... 4-39
front view ................................................................... 1-8
Electronic Pressure (E/P) Regulators ............................ 4-19
installation.................................................................. 3-1
Emergency Machine Off ....................................... See EMO
levelers ....................................................................... 1-9 Emergency Shutdown ................................................... 2-14
leveling ...................................................................... 3-5 recovery .................................................................... 2-15
lower front cabinet ................................................... 1-13 situations................................................................... 2-15
maintenance ..........................................See Maintenance
EMO ........................................................... 1-10, 1-15, 2-14
safety .......................................................................... 2-1
ESD
shutdown .................................................................. 4-40
grounding strap connector ........................................1-10
standard equipment .................................................... 1-3
E-Stop ................................................................... See EMO
startup ........................................................................ 4-2
Event Monitor ................................................................. 4-8
system description ...................................................... 1-1
controls tab ................................................................. 4-8
Computer ........................................................................ 1-3
events tab .................................................................... 4-8

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 1


SL-940 IOM Manual Index

F Leveling
coating system ............................................................ 3-5
Facility Requirements ..................................................... 9-1 Light Beacon .................................................. 1-3, 1-9, 2-18
Fan Width color indications ....................................................... 2-18
configuration ............................................................ 5-25 installation .................................................................. 3-8
Fixture Configuration .......................................... 5-18–5-20 Lockout/Tagout ............................................................. 2-16
fixture constraint location ........................................ 5-18 LOTO .................................................... See Lockout/Tagout
systems with camera ................................................ 5-19 Low Air Pressure Sensor ................................................. 1-4
Fluid Filter Low Fluid Scale .............................................................. 1-5
cleaning ...................................................................... 6-5 Low Fluid Sensor ............................................................ 1-5
Fluid Pressure Regulator and Gauge ............................. 4-19 Low Solvent Cup Sensor ................................................. 1-5
Fluid Reservoir Lubricating the Cables .................................................. 6-11
filling........................................................................ 4-25 Lubricating the XY Linear Guides ................................ 6-13
Fluid System
flushing .................................................................... 4-26
Fluid System Enclosure ................................................ 1-15
M
Front Panel............................................................. 1-9, 1-10 Main Air Inlet................................................................1-15
Fuse Replacement Main Air Regulator and Gauge ........................... 1-15, 4-17
Main PWA ............................................................... 8-67 Main Power Circuit Breaker................................ 1-15, 1-18
SDHC ....................................................................... 8-67 Main Power Inlet ................................................. 1-15, 1-18
Maintenance
G cable tension reminder .............................................. 6-15
changing material/flushing fluid system ................... 4-26
Grounding Strap Connector .......................................... 1-10 cleaning the fluid filter ............................................... 6-5
filling the fluid reservoir ........................................... 4-25
H lubricating the cables ................................................ 6-11
lubricating the cables and liner guides ...................... 6-11
Halogenated Hydrocarbon Solvents................................ 2-4 lubricating the linear guides...................................... 6-13
High Pressure Fluids ....................................................... 2-4 record keeping ............................................................ 6-1
tensioning conveyor chains ...................................... 6-18
tensioning the XY cables .......................................... 6-16
I tensioning the Z cable ............................................... 6-17
Installation Manuals Supplied ............................................................ 1-2
adjusting the levelers .................................................. 3-3 Material Change Over System .............................. 1-5, 1-15
anchoring the coating system ................................... 3-10 Material Characterization ..................................... 4-28–4-34
computer .................................................................... 3-9 Material Safety ................................................................ 2-3
connecting the power and air supply ........................ 3-11
light beacon ................................................................ 3-8 N
removing the shipping brackets.................................. 3-2
unpacking the coating area ......................................... 3-4 Needle Finder
Integrated Safety Systems configuration ............................................................ 5-29
shutdown recovery .................................................... G-2 tolerances.................................................................. 5-30
Interlock ........................................................................ 2-16 Non-Circulating Fluid System....................................... 1-17
Inverter Non-Recoverable Interlock Shutdown ........................... G-2
configuration ............................................................ 5-23
O
J Operator Screen
Jog Controls control panel ............................................................... 4-9
shortcut keys ............................................................ 4-14 event monitor.............................................................. 4-8
Jog Window .................................................................. 4-10 menu bar ..................................................................... 4-6
conveyor jog controls ............................................... 4-13 running a program .................................................... 4-37
robot jog controls ..................................................... 4-10 variable monitor ......................................................... 4-7
rotate and tilt ................................................... 4-11–4-12
tool button ................................................................ 4-11
P
L Parts List ..................................................................... 8-107
Parts Replacement
Laser Fan Width Control ......................................... 1-4, 2-7 0-100 psi/kpa gauge .................................................. 8-75
amplifier ................................................................... 1-13 3 way high flow valve .............................................. 8-63
Laser Pointer ................................................................... 1-4 3 way valve assembly ............................................... 8-57
Laser Radiation ............................................................... 2-7 30 degree stop pin..................................................... 8-30
Levelers .......................................................................... 1-9 accessories PWA ...................................................... 8-69

2 © 2019 Nordson Corporation


SL-940 IOM Manual Index

camera ........................................................................ 8-8 Removing the Rear Cable Covers ................................. 6-10
camera lens .............................................................. 8-10 Removing the X-Axis Cable Covers ............................... 6-8
camera, lens, and laser pointer ................................... 8-8 Removing the Y-Axis Cable Covers ............................... 6-9
cm servo amp pwa ................................................... 8-59 Reservoir Air Pressure Switch.......................................1-15
CM XY drive ........................................................... 8-79 Reservoir Pressure Gauge and Regulator ......................1-13
components inside the electrical/pneumatic panel ... 8-53 Reservoir Pressure Regulator and Gauge ...................... 4-18
components inside the fluid system cover ................ 8-89 Return Material Authorization ........................................ 8-2
components inside the front hood .............................. 8-4 Robot .............................................................................1-11
components inside the front panel ............................ 8-47 Robot Configuration...................................................... 5-24
components inside the lower rear cover ................. 8-101 safe z height .............................................................. 5-24
components inside the top cover .............................. 8-13 speed limit ................................................................ 5-24
control panel buttons ................................................ 8-38 z speed ...................................................................... 5-24
conveyor and service station components ................ 8-27 Rotate and Tilt ...................................................... 4-11–4-12
conveyor chains ....................................................... 8-27 Running a Program ....................................................... 4-37
credit and exchanges .................................................. 8-2 batch system ............................................................. 4-38
diaphram pump ........................................................ 8-97 conveyor system ....................................................... 4-37
EMO actuator switch ...................................... 8-41, 8-77
fluid filter ................................................................. 8-95
front pulley assemblies............................................. 8-15 S
heater assembly ............................................... 8-91, 8-93 Safety .............................................................................. 2-1
home sensor PWA.................................................... 8-18 beacon color indicatons ............................................ 2-18
interlock switch .......................................................... 8-4 equipment lockout/tagout ......................................... 2-16
LED light ................................................................... 8-6 halogenated hydrocarbon solvents .............................. 2-4
main air regulator ..................................................... 8-87 high pressure fluids..................................................... 2-4
main PWA fuse ........................................................ 8-67 intended use ................................................................ 2-1
mini regulator ........................................................... 8-73 interlock............................................................. 1-5, 2-16
miniature regulator ................................................... 8-49 laser ............................................................................ 2-7
OFF Switch .............................................................. 8-45 lifting and transport .................................................... 2-6
ON switch ................................................................ 8-43 material safety ............................................................ 2-3
optional laser pointer................................................ 8-11 misuse ......................................................................... 2-2
ordering information .................................................. 8-2 personnel safety .......................................................... 2-2
parts list .................................................................. 8-107 safety data sheet.......................................................... 1-1
power manager assembly ....................................... 8-101 service shutdown ...................................................... 2-16
power supply .......................................................... 8-105 toxic materials ............................................................ 2-3
pressure gauge .......................................................... 8-51 Safety Data Sheet .................................................... 1-1, A-1
rear pulley assemblies .............................................. 8-20 Moly-Graph Extreme Pressure Grease ...................... A-8
record keeping............................................................ 8-3 Multemp PS NO 2 ..................................................... A-2
return material authorization ...................................... 8-2 Safety Interlock ............................................................... 1-5
sensor board assembly ............................................. 8-34 Safety Warning Labels .................................................... 2-8
servo power control pwa .......................................... 8-61 SC-104/105HS Circulating Film Coater.......................... 1-7
SL-940 main pwa ..................................................... 8-65 SC-204/205HS Non-Circulating Film Coater ................. 1-7
solvent cup brackets ................................................. 8-36 SDS ................................................... See Safety Data Sheet
step motor ................................................................ 8-32 Sensor
universal power supply ............................................ 8-71
board .........................................................................1-12
unpacking replacement parts ...................................... 8-3
low fluid ............................................................ 1-5, G-3
vent switch assembly ............................................... 8-55
low solvent cup ........................................................... 1-5
warranty ..................................................................... 8-2
X carriage pulley ...................................................... 8-25 Servo Power Supply ......................................................1-18
Y carriage pulley ...................................................... 8-23 Setup Sequence ............................................................... 5-2
Pneumatic Regulators and Gauges ....................... 4-16–4-22 Shortcut Keys ................................................................ 4-14
air assist pressure ..................................................... 4-19 Shutdown ...................................................................... 4-40
conveyor air pressure ............................................... 4-21 extended shutdown ................................................... 4-41
electronic pressure (E/P regulators ........................... 4-19 routine shutdown ...................................................... 4-40
fluid air pressure ...................................................... 4-19 service shutdown ............................................. 2-16, 4-41
main air pressure ...................................................... 4-17 SMEMA ........................................................................1-15
manual regulators and gauges .................................. 4-20 SMEMA Sensors ............................................................. 1-6
reservoir air pressure ................................................ 4-18 Solvent Cups ......................................................... 1-5, 1-12
Pneumatics Spare Parts List ........................................................... 8-107
troubleshooting .......................................................... 7-3 Specifications .................................................................. 9-3
Power Manager ..................................................... 1-18, B-2 facility requirements ................................................... 9-1
stability analysis ......................................................... 9-7
Spill Pan ................................................................ 1-13, 6-3
R Start Button ...................................................................1-10
Startup ............................................................................. 4-2
Record Keeping ................................................ 5-1, 6-1, 8-3

© 2019 Nordson Corporation 3


SL-940 IOM Manual Index

Stop Button ................................................................... 1-10 system power .............................................................. 7-2


Stop Pin ........................................................................ 1-12 vision system .............................................................. 7-4
Supported Coating Materials .......................................... 1-2
U
T Unpacking Replacement Parts......................................... 8-3
Teach Relative XY ................................................ 5-8–5-10 Upstream/Downstream SMEMA Sensors ....................... 1-6
Tool Button ................................................................... 4-11 USB Hub .......................................................................1-13
Tool Configuration ................................................ 5-3–5-17
calibrate rotate/tilt ........................................... 5-14–5-15
camera configuration........................................... 5-4–5-7
V
choose color ............................................................. 5-17 Valve .............................................. See Coating Applicators
fluid shape ................................................................ 5-16 Variable Monitor ............................................................. 4-7
tool shape ................................................................. 5-16 Ventilation System .......................................................... 1-6
tool z offset ..................................................... 5-11–5-13 Viscosity Control System ................................................ 1-7
Tool Z Offset ....................................................... 5-11–5-13 Vision System ................................................................. 1-6
Tooling Rails .................................................................. 1-9 troubleshooting ........................................................... 7-4
Training
student registration ..................................................... 1-2
Troubleshooting Z
conveyor..................................................................... 7-3 Z Speed ......................................................................... 5-24
pneumatics ................................................................. 7-3
record keeping............................................................ 7-1

4 © 2019 Nordson Corporation

You might also like